renovation of the sixth floor 6c - city record online

PROJECT MANUAL

NYC Health & HospitalsMetropolitan Hospital

Renovation of the Sixth Floor 6C

Project No: 45871901 First Avenue

New York, New York 10029

Issued for BidMarch 24, 2017

Volume 1 of 2

NYCH&H Metropolitan Hospital Renovation of the Sixth Floor 6C New York, New York 10029

March 24, 2017 Issued for Bid

Project No. 4587

SEALS PAGE 000107 - 1

DOCUMENT 000107 - SEALS PAGE

1.1 DESIGN PROFESSIONALS OF RECORD

A. ARCHITECT SEAL

ARRAY ARCHITECTS, INC

44 East 30th Street 10th Floor New York, NY 10016 212-689-3110

License No.

Expiration date: Divisions 01 - 34 Sections except where indicated and prepared by other design professionals of record

B. FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEER SEAL

Kallen & Lemelson Consulting Engineers, LLP 520 8th Avenue, 17th Floor New York, NY 10018 212-643-9898

License No. Expiration date:

The following Sections are included in the document:



Project No. 4587


C. PLUMBING ENGINEER SEAL




D. HVAC ENGINEER SEAL


License No. [Expiration date:]




Project No. 4587


E. ELECTRICAL ENGINEER SEAL




END OF DOCUMENT 000107



Project No. 4587

TABLE OF CONTENTS - VOLUME 1 000113 - 1

SECTION 000113 - TABLE OF CONTENTS - VOLUME 1

ISSUE DATE

LATEST

REVISION

DIVISION-0 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

000101 Project Title Page 03/24/2017 000107 Seal Page 03/24/2017 000113 Table of Contents 03/24/2017 000115 List of Drawings 03/24/2017 DIVISION-1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 010110 Summary of Project 03/24/2017 010360 Contract Considerations 03/24/2017 010400 Coordination 03/24/2017 010600 Regulatory Requirements 03/24/2017 011000 Special Project Procedures 03/24/2017 013000 Submittals 03/24/2017 015000 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 03/24/2017 015010 ILSM During Construction 03/24/2017 015020 Infection Control Measures During Construction 03/24/2017 016000 Materials and Equipment 03/24/2017 017000 Contract Closeout 03/24/2017 017329 Cutting and Patching 03/24/2017 DIVISION-2 – EXISITING CONDITIONS 024119 Selective Structure Demolition 03/24/2017 DIVISION-3 - CONCRETE: 035416 Hydraulic Cement Underlayment 03/24/2017 DIVISION-4 - MASONRY: Not Used DIVISION-5 - METALS: 055000 Metal Fabrications 03/24/2017 055819 Heating - Cooling Unit Covers 03/24/2017 057000 Decorative Metal 03/24/2017



Project No. 4587


DIVISION-6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES: 061053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 03/24/2017 062210 Custom Millwork 03/24/2017 064116 Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets 03/24/2017 066500 Resin Panels 03/24/2017 DIVISION-7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION: 077200 Roof Accessories 03/24/2017 078413 Penetration Firestopping 03/24/2017 078443 Joint Firestopping 03/24/2017 079200 Joint Sealants 03/24/2017 079219 Acoustical Joint Sealants 03/24/2017 DIVISION-8 – OPENINGS: 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 03/24/2017 081416 Flush Wood Doors 03/24/2017 083113 Access Doors and Frames 03/24/2017 087100 Door Hardware 03/24/2017 088000 Glazing 03/24/2017 088113 Decorative Glass Glazing 03/24/2017 088700 Architectural Window Films 03/24/2017 088813 Fire-Resistant Glazing 03/24/2017 089119 Fixed Louvers 03/24/2017 DIVISION-9 - FINISHES: 092116.23 Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies 03/24/2017 092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing 03/24/2017 092900 Gypsum Board 03/24/2017 093013 Ceramic Tiling 03/24/2017

095000 Acoustical Metal Pan Ceilings 03/24/2017 095113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 03/24/2017 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories 03/24/2017 096516 Resilient Sheet Flooring 03/24/2017 096519 Resilient Tile Flooring 03/24/2017 096723 Resinous Flooring 03/24/2017 097200 Wall Coverings 03/24/2017 097723 Fabric-Wrapped Panels 03/24/2017 099123 Interior Painting 03/24/2017 DIVISION-10 - SPECIALTIES:



Project No. 4587


102123 Cubicles Curtains and Track 03/24/2017 102219 Demountable Partitions 03/24/2017 102600 Wall and Door Protection 03/24/2017 102800 Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories 03/24/2017 104413 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets 03/24/2017 105113 Metal Lockers 03/24/2017 DIVISION-11 - EQUIPMENT: Not Used DIVISION-12 - FURNISHINGS: 122413 Manual Roller Shades 03/24/2017

122513 Motorized Roller Shades 03/24/2017 123661.16 Solid Surfacing Countertops & Sills 03/24/2017 DIVISION-13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION: Not Used DIVISION-14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS: Not Used

END TABLE OF CONTENTS

NYCH&H Metropolitan HospitalRenovation of the Sixth Floor 6CNew York, New York 10029

March 24, 2017Issued for Bid

Project No. 4587

LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 000115 - 1

DOCUMENT 000115 - LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

1.1 LIST OF DRAWINGS

A. Drawings: Drawings consist of the Contract Drawings and other drawings listed on the Drawing List & Project Information page of the separately bound drawing set titled Renovation of the Sixth Floor 6C, dated 03/24/2017, as modified by subsequent Addenda and Contract modifications.

END OF DOCUMENT 000115



Project No. 4587

SUMMARY OF PROJECT 010110 - 1

SECTION 010110 - SUMMARY OF PROJECT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 All Division 1 - General Requirements and insert Sections including this one shall be considered part of each Contract of this Project.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Scope of Project.

B. Intent.

C. Contract Documents.

D. Contract Drawings.

E. Work by the Facility.

F. Scheduling and Access

1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. General Requirements of this specification, listed in the Table of Contents

B. Technical Specifications

1.4 SCOPE OF PROJECT

A. The project encompasses:

1. General Construction Work2. H.V.A.C. Work3. Electrical Work4. Plumbing Work

B. Project Description: The project is comprised of a complete demolition and construction of the interior of the sixth floor C wing to create a new medical oncology center. The space is approximately 7,600 square feet in area. The program includes infusion areas, pharmacy lab, waiting areas, patient education space, multi-function group rooms, exam rooms, infusion area, and support spaces — soiled utility, clean supply, toilet rooms, etc. The renovation will include new plumbing, lighting, sprinkler, medical gas and fire alarm services, along with a new supplemental HVAC system. New drywall partitions, doors, frames, hardware, finishes, and architectural casework is also required for the project.



Project No. 4587


C. This shall include but not limited to :

1. Scheduling and coordinating the work of each contract with the work of all other contractors under the supervision of the Construction manager.

2. Work throughout the entire building on all floors and areas of the hospital as required to complete this project.

3. Coordinating the work of each section of these specifications with the entire project.4. Maintain up to date as built progress drawings on site at all times.5. Submittals of shop drawings, product data, and samples for approval.6. Cooperation and coordination with the owner/Hospital in terms of access to the work

area.

1.5 INTENT

A. Work to be done under this Contract comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, and other appurtenances necessary and required to complete the work in accordance with the Contract drawings and specifications.

B. It is the intent of the Contract that all parts of the Contract Documents are complimentary to each other and any work shown or called for in any one part shall constitute a part of the scope of the Contract to the same extent as if shown or called for in any other part. In addition:

1. Any work not particularly specified or detailed in any part of the Contract Documents, but involved in carrying out the complete intent and proper execution of the part of the work, is required, and shall be performed by the Contractor, at no additional cost to the Corporation;

2. The apparent absence of any part of the Contract as to any detailed description of any work to be done, or to be furnished, shall be interpreted as meaning under this contract that the best general practice shall prevail, and that the best materials and workmanship shall be used in carrying out the part of the work; and

3. Should there be a difference, or conflict between the way related work is shown, or called for, in various parts of the Contract Documents, after applying General Conditions 4, it shall be deemed that the Contractor has estimated the most In-expensive way of doing such work unless he shall have asked for, and obtained a decision in writing, from the Construction Manager before bid as to what shall govern.

4. Unless otherwise stated in the contract, words which have well known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the contract in accordance with such recognized meanings.

1.6 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Contractor shall examine all contract drawings and all other contract Documents of all other contract for work described in those contracts but required to be performed under his/her contract. Each contractor shall furnish and install such required work.

B. Documents Furnished to the Contractor - After the award of the contract, the Contractor will be furnished with two (2) sets of paper prints of all Construction Drawings.

C. The Contractor will receive two (2) complete sets of specifications.



Project No. 4587


D. Additional copies of Drawings and Specifications, when requested, will be furnished to the Contractor. Additional sets will be issued at cost.

E. Coordination and Cooperation- Since the Contracts are related to the project, each contractor shall consult and study the requirements of the Contract documents of all contracts furnished him, so that he may become acquainted with the work of the project as a whole in order to achieve the proper coordination and cooperation necessary for the efficient and timely performance of work.

F. Supplementary Drawings - When, in the opinion of the Construction Manager, it becomes necessary to more fully explain the work to be done, or to illustrate the work further, or show any changes which may be required, drawings known as Supplementary Drawings will be prepared by the Project Designer.

G. Where Supplementary Drawings entail extra work, compensation to the Contractor shall be subject to the terms of the “Agreement”. The Supplementary Drawings shall be binding upon the Contractor with the same force as the Contract Drawings.

H. Copies of prints of these drawings will be furnished to the Contractor.

I. Copies to Subcontractors - The contractor shall furnish each of his subcontractors such copies of the Specification as may be required for his work.

J. Contractor to Check Drawings - The Contractor shall verify all dimensions, quantities and details shown on the drawings, schedule or other data received from the Corporation, and shall notify them of all errors, omissions, conflict and discrepancies found therein. The Contractor shall identify all field conditions. Notice of such errors shall be given before the Contractor proceeds with any work. Figures shall be used in preference to scale dimensions and Large-Scale Drawings in preference to Small-Scale Drawings.

1.7 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

A. Contract drawings are as listed in Section 000115 "List of Drawings".

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. The normal Project work day is defined as the time period between 8:00 am and 4:30 pm, local time, Monday thru Friday, excluding holidays. For the purpose of this project, holidays are defined as: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day.

B. Work Performed Other Than Normal Working Hours shall be pre-approved.



Project No. 4587


1.9 ACCESS TO THE WORK AREAS

A. The Owner reserves the right to change the schedule as well as to direct the Contractor to areas of the Hospital which are free and accessible.

1. The Contractor shall coordinate all deliveries, storage, removals and provide continuous egress circulation in and around the work area.

2. Elevator Access: The Facility will assign an elevator car at the discretion of the Institution for the contractor’s delivery of materials and other accessories to the work site. The hours of use will be established by the Facility and the Construction Manager.

END OF SECTION 010110



Project No. 4587

CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 010360 - 1

PART 1 - SECTION 010360 - CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONSGENERAL

1.1 All Division 1 – General Requirement Sections including this one shall be Considered part of each contract of this Project.


A. Allowance and unit prices.

B. Alternates


A. General Conditions of this Contract

B. Section 010400 – Coordination: Cutting and patching work involving unseen firestopping work.

1.4 UNIT PRICES

A. Unit Price No. 1: Access Doors

1. Description: To furnish and install each type of access door per specification section 08305113.

2. Unit of Measurement: Per unit.

B. Unit Price No. 2: Existing Partitions

1. Description: To work on existing partition Type A through E as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Unit of Measurement: Per square foot.




Project No. 4587

COORDINATION 010400 - 1

SECTION 010400 - COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 All Division 1 – General Requirements Sections including this one shall be considered part of each Contract of this project.

A. Cooperation Between Subcontractors.

B. Construction Coordination.

C. Contractors Superintendent.

D. Field Measurements.

E. Project Meetings.

F. Project Logs.

G. Firestopping and Patching of Penetrations Found During Course of this Project.

H. Owner Furnished Equipment.


A. General Conditions of the Contract.

B. Section 010360- Contract Considerations: Allowance and Unit Prices related to firestopping and patching of penetrations found during the course of this Project.

C. Section 017329 - Cutting and Patching for additional information related to firestopping and patching of penetrations found during the course of this project.

1.3 COOPERATION BETWEEN SUBCONTRACTORS

A. In as much as the completion of the project within the prescribed limit of time is dependent very largely upon the close and active cooperation of all those engaged therein, it is therefore expressly understood and agreed that the subcontractor shall lay out and install his work at such time or times and in such manner as not to delay or interfere with the carrying forward of the work of the other subcontractors. In the event of any dispute among various subcontractors which may retard the progress of the work, the same shall be adjusted by the President, whose decision as to the party or parties at fault and as to the manner in which the matter may be adjusted, shall be adjusted by the President, whose decision as to the party or parties at fault and as to the manner in which the matter my be adjusted, shall be binding and conclusive on all parties.



Project No. 4587


1.4 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION

A. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing and approving the shop drawings of all contracts and coordinating them with his work.

B. Each subcontractor is responsible for laying out his own work.

1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. The Contractor is responsible for checking and coordinating all existing dimensions and conditions as they pertain to all installations and record them in Shop Drawing Submissions and note where they disagree with contract documents.

1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. The Contractor shall preside over the Project Meeting.

1. Meetings shall be held every two weeks and as scheduled by the Owner's representative at the site.

2. Copy of current approved construction progress schedule is to be furnished by the Contractor.

3. The Contractor shall record the minutes of the meeting.4. The Contractor will prepare an agenda of items to be discussed. In general, after informal

discussion of any item on the agenda, the Owner's representative will summarize the discussion in a brief statement for the record.

5. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary typing and printing of the minutes. Ample copies of the printed minutes shall be furnished and distributed by the Contractor to the Owner, Architect and all those attending the meeting.

6. Coordination meeting shall also be called by the Contractor for the purpose of coordinating, expediting and scheduling the work in accordance with the Construction Schedule. All subcontractors, material men or vendors whose presence is necessary are required to attend. These meetings may be held at the same place and immediately following Project Meetings held by the Owner's representative. Minutes of these meetings shall be recorded, typed and printed by the Contractor and distributed to all the parties.

1.7 PROJECT LOGS

A. The Contractor shall prepare daily LOG reports of the work performed the previous day by any of the employees, including the employees of his subcontractors. The reports shall be prepared by the Contractor’s Superintendent and shall bear his signature. Each report shall contain the following information:

1. The type of materials and quantities and/or major equipment being installed by the Contractor and the total number of employees worked in each category on that particular day. All employees reflected on the contractors daily report are to be classified by trade, Race and Gender, in the following categories on the report: Foreman, Journeyman, Apprentice.



Project No. 4587


2. The names of the subcontractors working and the type of materials and quantities and/or major equipment being installed, together with the total number of employees working for each subcontractor on that particular day.

3. The major construction equipment being used by each contractor and/or subcontractor.4. Work pertaining to change order and/or work done under protest.

1.8 FIRESTOPPING AND PATCHING OF PENETRATIONS FOUND DURING THE COURSE OF THIS PROJECT

A. Coordinate with Contractor to confirm with interim Life Safety and JCAHO requirements. When each subcontractor reveals existing penetrations it shall be immediately reported to Contractor to verity that the condition is existing.

B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to patch existing penetrations revealed by all the subcontractors on this Project no later than the end of the work day that penetration is revealed.

1. This work shall be coordinated between General Construction Contractor and the subcontractor who revealed penetration to close penetration by the end of work day.

2. Annular spaces and blank openings smaller than 2 square feet in fire rated walls, floors, and ceiling shall be filled with approved firestopping materials using proper method as described under Section 078413, Penetration Firestopping and Section 010360, Contract Considerations.

3. Blank opening larger than 2 square feet in fire rated walls, floors, and ceilings shall be filled with the same material, and bearing the same fire rating or higher as materials in existing wall and floor. Method of integrating penetration fill shall comply with method to maintain fire rating. Refer to Section 01036, Contract Considerations.

1.9 OWNER-FURNISHED EQUIPMENT

A. Coordinate the installation of the equipment or system with all trades. Any problem noted shall be brought to the attention of the Architect. This notification must be submitted in writing and no claims for additional work shall be considered unless the request for clarification has been initiated by the Contractor.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for receiving, storing, protecting, providing all rough-in services, installing and testing of the equipment or system. The Contractor shall receive, inventory, verify quantity and condition and notify the Owner in accordance with NYCH&H Metropolitan Hospital standards.

C. Manufacturer's shop drawings or installation drawings for certain equipment or systems may be furnished separately.



Project No. 4587


D. OFS Furniture System:

1. OFS Brands; Mile Marker series located at Infusion Bays. Refer to product data sheet at the end of this section.

2. Owner's Responsibility: The Owner will provide the furniture system to the Contractor for installation.

3. Contractor's Responsibility: The Contractor shall provide and install the necessary electrical and data rough-ins and connections for the furniture system. The Contractor shall receive, store, and install the furniture system. The Contractor shall make all electrical and data connections to the furniture system. The Contractor shall provide and install the cove molding at the base of the furniture system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

(Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

(Not Applicable)


CO

VE

MO

LDIN

G S

UP

PLI

ED

AN

D IN

ST

ALL

ED

BY

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR



Project No. 4587

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 010600 - 1

SECTION 010600 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 All division 1 - General Requirements Sections including this one shall be considered part of each Contract of this Specification.


A. Compliance.

B. Permits.

C. Inspections.

D. Acceptance Tests.

E. Conflicts of Interest.



1.4 COMPLIANCE

A. The work under this Project shall be in full compliance with the New York City Building Codes and with rules, regulations, and codes of other cities and state agencies having jurisdiction, eg. Fire Department.

1.5 PERMITS

A. The Contractor shall obtain all permits that are required by the City of New York Department of Buildings (N.Y.D.O.B.) and all other city agencies that require permits for the work of this Project.

1.6 INSPECTIONS

A. The Contractor shall retain a licensed Architect or Engineer to:

1. File form TR1 informing the N.Y.D.O.B. that he or she will be performing controlled, or special inspections or both.

2. File other necessary N.Y.D.O.B. papers.3. Perform controlled or special inspections as required by the N.Y.D O B or other agencies

having jurisdiction eg. FD/DEP.



Project No. 4587


B. All fees that are necessary to retain a professional licensed Architect or Engineer responsible to HHC to perform the controlled, special inspections, and to obtain all required permits shall be borne by the Contractor which retains the professional. Submit these to Construction Management and copy to other Contractors. Before certification of substantial completion is issued, the contractor will be required to arrange for final inspection by the staff of the D.O.B. or other city agencies.

C. A certificate of electrical inspection to be supplied by the Contractor for the electrical work shall be required before receiving substantial completion payment.

D. The contractor for the electrical work shall submit proof of filing for a certificate of electrical inspection, by forwarding to the Construction Manager the pink copy of the job posting card issued by the Bureau of Gas and Electricity in connection with each application for certificate of electrical inspection.

1.7 ACCEPTANCE TESTS

A. Governmental Agencies - All equipment and appliances furnished and installations made under the contract shall conform to the requirements of the Specifications, and shall in any event be not less than that necessary to comply with the minimum requirements of the Bureau of Gas and Electricity and all other governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

B. Notice of Tests - Whenever the Specifications and/or any governmental agency having jurisdiction requires the acceptance test, the contractor shall arrange for and give written notice to all concerned of the time when these tests will be conducted.

C. Energy etc. for Tests - The Corporation will furnish energy, fuel, oil, water, light and electrical instruments as required for all testing.

D. The contractor shall furnish labor and all other material and Instruments necessary to conduct the acceptance tests at no additional cost to the Corporation.

E. Certificate - The final acceptance by the Owner shall be contingent upon the Contractor delivering to the Owner all necessary certificates evidencing compliance in every respect with the requirements of the agencies having jurisdiction.

1.8 CONFLICTS OF INTEREST

A. The Charter of the City of New York in relation to conflicts of interest provides, among a number of safeguards, that:

1. No employee or person whose salary is payable in whole or part from the city treasury shall accept any valuable gift, whether in the form of service, loan, thing or promise, or any other form from any person, firm or corporation which to his knowledge is interested directly or indirectly, in any manner whatsoever, in business dealings with the City;

2. Any violation of any of the provisions of this section shall, at the option of the Comptroller, render forfeit and void the Contract, work, business, sale or transaction affected;



Project No. 4587


3. Other sections of the City Charter, the Administrative Code and the Penal Law are applicable in implementing the basic conflicts of interest section and under certain circumstances penalties may be invoked against donor as well as the recipients of any form of valuable gift;

4. Notice is hereby given that sections of the City Charter, the Administrative Code and the Penal Law alluded to herein shall apply under the terms of this contract to circumstances relevant to conflicts of interest and shall be extended in application to subcontractors authorized to perform work, labor and services pursuant to this contract, and further it shall be the duty and responsibility of the prime contractor to so inform their respective subcontractors.

END OF THE SECTION 010600



Project No. 4587

SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 011000 - 1

SECTION 011000 - SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 All Division 1 - General Requirements Sections including this shall be considered part of each Contract of this Project.


A. Hazardous Procedures.

B. Asbestos Procedures.

C. Disturbance of Facility Operations.

D. Infection Control.

E. Project Safety Program.

F. Safety Representative.



B. Section 01300, Submittals for items under this Section that require submittals.

1.4 HAZARDOUS PROCEDURES

A. Hazardous materials such as asbestos, asbestos products, polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) or other toxic substances shall not be allowed on the site nor be used in the work. The Contractor shall notify the Construction Manager if any of the products or materials specified in the Contract Documents or proposed by the Contractor or its subcontractors or material suppliers are encountered on the job site contain or are reasonably believed to contain hazardous materials in any form, so that the Construction Manager can determine whether such materials may be used or need to be removed from the site or rendered harmless in a manner which will not adversely affect the health of any persons which will comply with applicable governmental laws and regulations.

B. Storage of hazardous materials over 60 gallons shall be off site.

C. Storage of hazardous materials shall be performed as directed by the Facility Safety Officer through Construction Management. For allowable on site storage each Contractor must provide NFPA approved containers.



Project No. 4587


D. The use of flammable liquids requires advance written approval from Construction Management.

E. Limit amount of flammable liquids and compressed gases on the job site to a one day supply. Do not store additional gas cylinders in the hospital.

F. Chain compressed gas cylinders to wall or store in an approved cart (provided by Contractor).

G. Work Procedures involving use of open flame require the following special procedures:

1. Provide at least 1 fire watchman and full fire extinguisher at immediate site of open flame procedure.

2. Notify construction Management 2 working days prior to start of open flame Procedure.3. If alarm systems are not in operations in the immediate area, work may not begin until a

fire watch is established.

H. Do not use construction devices employing internal combustion engines.

1.5 DISTURBANCE OF FACILITY OPERATION

A. The Contractor shall not interrupt any of the services of the building nor interfere with these in any way without the express permission of the Owner. Such interruption and interferences shall be made as brief as possible and only at the time stated.

B. Under no circumstances will the Contractor or his workmen be permitted to use any part of the building as a shop.

C. Unnecessary noise shall be avoided at all times and necessary noise shall be reduced to a minimum, not to exceed the noise level limitations of the New York City Noise Control Code and regulations issued by the Administrator of the Environmental Protection Administration pursuant to Section 1403.3 - 2.25(c).

D. The Contractor in carrying out the work shall use means, methods and tools which cause the least practical disturbance and disruption to on-going hospital activities due to noise and vibration.

E. If in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, the means, methods and tools used by the contractor cause significant adverse effect to on-going hospital activities, the Contractor shall immediately cease and desist from the use of such means, methods and tools when ordered by the Owner's Representative and shall employ during regular or off-hours means, methods and tools as are acceptable to the Owner's Representative.

F. Where the work makes temporary shutdowns of service unavoidable, they shall be made at such times as will cause the least interference with the established routine of hospital operations.

G. The Contractor shall arrange to work continuously, including other than normal working hours if required, to assure that services will be shut down only during the time actually required to make the necessary connections to existing work.



Project No. 4587


H. Contractors shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing relative to utility shutdowns or other hospital operations disturbances at least 72 hours prior to the shutdown or disturbances unless specified elsewhere.

I. The breaking into existing work shall be done only after approval in writing has been received from the Construction Manager.

J. All expenses incurred by the contractors in performing work off-hours will be borne by the contractors and will not be chargeable to the Corporation.

K. The Owner's Representative will institute a written sign off procedure for shutdowns and disturbance in accordance with this conditions of the General Conditions. Contractors must adhere to this procedure.

L. Given the nature of this project, Contractors must provide the necessary “bypass”. Valving, circuiting, barricading, fencing, protection or means in order to minimize shutdown and disturbances to hospital operation.

1.6 INFECTION CONTROL

A. Prior to entering patient areas, obtain clearance from Owner's Representative.

B. If a patient room has a warning label posted on it, do not enter before checking with Owner's Representative.

C. In patient areas contractors must work “cleanly” and clean all dust and debris immediately.

1.7 PROJECT SAFETY PROGRAM

A. The Contractor shall establish a company’s safety program and submit 3 copies to address the following:

1. Accident Prevention Program, monitoring and enforcing same.2. Training of employees.3. Safety equipment provided and its use.4. Fire Prevention Program.5. Fire Emergency Procedures.6. First Aid Procedures.7. Hazard communication Act/Right To Know Program.8. Accident Reporting Procedures.9. Documentation, reporting and record keeping.



Project No. 4587


1.8 SAFETY REPRESENTATIVE

A. Each contractor shall provide a trained Contractor Safety Representative who will work with house safety director and be responsible for the following:

1. Compliance with safety requirements of Article 19 of Title C of Building Code.2. Shall foster safety awareness in all employees.3. Shall attend each monthly project safety meeting.4. Shall conduct weekly Tool Inspection in coordination with safety director.5. Shall train their employees to perform their work in a safe manner and the ability to

recognize potential and actual hazards and unsafe acts. Shall direct all employees to wear hard hats and other required safety clothing as required.

6. Shall report all safety related matters to Construction Management.7. Shall be responsible for the Contractor Accident Reporting Requirements.8. Shall post emergency phone numbers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ASBESTOS

A. If, during the course of construction, the Contractor believes materials (exclusive of contracted removals) may be distributed in the course of performing his/her duties which may contain asbestos, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Construction Manager of the area(s) of concern. The asbestos Consultant shall assess the condition and shall advise the Contractor how to proceed.

B. If the presence of friable asbestos is suspected by the Contractor, work shall be suspended in the area in question and be redirected to other available areas of site and expedite analysis of suspected material in accordance with whether asbestos is present. Should no friable asbestos be found, the Contractor shall be directed to resume work immediately.

C. If the suspect materials is determined to contain asbestos and the quantity to be removed, repaired or replaced consists of less than 25 linear feet of pipe or less than 10 square feet of materials covering any duct, boiler, tank, turbine, furnace or structural member, such work shall be considered as part of the original contract for which no additional compensation shall be authorized. The Contractor shall, nevertheless perform such removal, repair or replacement in strict compliance with requirements of all regulatory agencies and organizations, including those listed below.



Project No. 4587


EXHAUST SYSTEM BALANCING

1. EPA

Environmental Protection Agency Region 11Federal Plaza-Room 1015New York, N.Y. 10279(212) 254-7307National Emission Standard for asbestos Part 61 – Subpart M

2. OSHA

Occupational Safety and Health Admin.New York Regional OfficeBroadway – Room 3445New York, NY 10036Paragraph 1910, 1001,1926.58- Occupational Exposure to Asbestos

3. NYC

Department of Environmental ProtectionBureau of Air ProtectionLafayette StreetNew York, NY 10012Local Law 76/85 and regulations promulgated theretoDept. of Sanitation, Environ. Invest.Chambers StreetNew York, N.Y. 10013Local Law 70 and regulations promulgated thereto




Project No. 4587

SUBMITTALS 013000 - 1

SECTION 013000 - SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 The following shall apply to work of this section:

A. Part 1, “Information for Bidders, Bid Agreement and General Conditions Governing All Contracts”.

B. Division 1 – General Requirements All Contracts Sections including this one shall be considered part of each Contract of this project.


A. Submittal Schedule

B. Submittal Procedures.

C. Shop drawings.

D. Approved Submittal

E. Submittal Logs

F. Product Data.

G. Samples.

H. Mock-up

I. Testing and Certifications

J. Cost Breakdown.

K. Progress Photographs.



B. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: approval of materials, and product options and substitutions.

C. Section 013146 – Special Requirements for M/E Work

D. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Warranties.



Project No. 4587


1.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. Within 10 consecutive calendar days after the start date designated in the Notice to Proceed letter, the prime Contractor shall submit to Construction Management, a schedule of submittals.

B. Submittals received on the date scheduled will be processed as specified. The Contractor will be held responsible for delays due to receiving submittals after the date indicated in the approved submittal schedule.

1.5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Correspondences

1. After “Notice to Proceed” is issued, an original and one copy of all correspondence except as noted below shall be sent directly to the Construction Manager at the project site. The original insurance shall be sent to Central Office, Office of Facilities Development, at 55 Water Street, New York, N.Y. 10038, 25th floor. One copy of the insurance should be sent to Construction Management, Field Office.

B. Transmittals

1. After Contract award, the Contractor shall send all submittals with a transmittal form, in duplicate, to Construction Management, containing the following information:

a. Dateb. Project name and project number and HHC contract numberc. Names of:

1) Contractor2) Subcontractor (if applicable)3) Manufacturer

d. Identification of product or material.e. Project specification number, clearly identified.f. Reference to construction drawings by drawing number.g. Three (3) of each Shop Drawing, Product Data or sample submitted.h. Notification of deviations from contract documents.

C. Other pertinent data.

D. Contractor’s Responsibility

1. The Contractor shall review each submittal from subcontractors, make changes or notation as necessary to conform to the Contract Documents, identify such review with review stamp and forward reviewed submittal with comments to the Architect for review. Return submittals not meeting contract requirements to subcontractors and do not forward such submittals for approval.

2. Verify field measurements and product catalog numbers or similar data.3. Notify Architect in writing at time of submission, of deviations in submittals from the

requirements of the Contract Documents.4. After approval is received distribute copies with one copy to be maintained at the Project

site for reference use and other copies distributed to suppliers and fabricators.

E. Provide the following information on each submittal listed on “Submittals” schedules.



Project No. 4587


1. Specifications section applicable.2. Manufacturer.3. Indication of specific items proposed.4. Attach information to actual sample.

1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Each contractor in accordance with approved schedule shall promptly prepare and submit layout detail and shop drawings of such parts of the work as are indicated in the specifications or as required. These shop drawings shall be made in accordance with the contract drawings, specifications and supplementary drawings if any, shall be accurate and distinct and give all the dimensions required for the fabrication, erection and installation of the work. Shop drawing shall include all field conditions, and shall be coordinated with all trades: HVAC, Plumbing Electrical and G.C in an approved consolidated shop drawing schedule.

B. Size of Drawings - The shop drawings, unless otherwise directed, shall be on sheets of the same size as the contract drawings, with a ½ inch marginal space for binding on the left side.

C. Scope of Drawings - Shop drawings shall be numbered consecutively and shall accurately and distinctly represent the following:

1. All work and erection dimensions.2. Arrangement and sectional views.3. Necessary details, including complete information for making necessary connections with

other work.4. Kinds of materials and finishes.5. All other information required by the Corporation or for coordination with other trades.6. Shop drawings that lack either appropriate information, are not legible and do not

address field and installation specifics will not be reviewed and will be returned as ‘Non Submissions’.

D. Title - Shop drawings shall be dated and contain:

1. Name of the Project, Project Number and Contract Number.2. The descriptive names of equipment, or materials covered by the drawings, and the

classified item numbers, if any, under which they are required.3. The location of points at which materials, or equipment, are to be installed in the work.

E. The submission of shop drawings shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal, a triplicate, containing the name of the project, project and contract numbers, the name of the contractor, the number of drawings, titles and any other requirements. Resubmissions of the same drawings shall bear the original number of drawings and the original titles.

F. Procedure for submittal and approval of all shop drawings - the contractor is to adhere to the approved shop drawing schedule and maintain shop drawings submittal log. Each prime contractor shall submit three (3) (not larger than 24" x 36") prints of shop drawings to the Corporation for review and approval. A satisfactory shop drawing will be stamped “Approved” or “Approved as Noted” and date; two copies thereof will be returned to the contractor.



Project No. 4587


G. Should the shop drawing not be approved by the Corporation it will be stamped “Disapproved and will be returned to the contractor with the necessary corrections and changes to be made indicated thereon. The contractor shall revise and resubmit the shop drawings within 5 CCD as required by the Corporation until approval thereof is obtained. However, shop drawings which have been stamped “Approved as Noted” shall be considered as “Approved” shop drawings, with the contractor accepting the notes as part of his submission and need not be revised and resubmitted.

H. Copies of Transmittals - Copies of all shop drawing transmittal letters from the contractor shall be sent to the Owner’s field office.

I. No work called for the shop drawings shall be done until approval of on the said drawings by the Owner is given. In addition to the foregoing shop drawing submission procedure, a copy of any shop drawing prepared by the contractor indicating work related to, adjacent to, impinging upon, or affecting work to be done by other contractors shall be transmitted to the contractors so affected at their job meetings and shall be so recorded in the minutes of said meeting.

J. Variations - If the shop drawings show variations from the contract requirements because of standard shop practice, or other reasons, the contractor, shall make specific mention of such variations in his letter of submittal.

K. Responsibility of Contractor - The approval of shop drawings will be general and shall not relieve the contractor of responsibility for the accuracy of such shop drawings, nor for the proper fitting and construction of the work, nor of the furnishing of materials as required by the contract and not indicated on the shop drawings. Approval of shop drawings shall not be construed as approving departures from the contract drawings, supplementary drawing or specifications.

L. Any delay resulting from a contractor’s request for a substitution or deviation from the contract will not be considered as an excusable delay for granting an extension of contract time.

M. Shop Drawing Schedule - To enable the work to be transacted in an orderly and expeditious manner, the contractor, within ten (10) CCD’s after the date specified for the commencement of the work, unless otherwise directed by the Owner shall submit a proposed coordinated progress schedule showing the anticipated time of commencement and completion of the submission of shop drawings for each of the various operations to be performed under the contract. The proposed schedule shall be revised until the same is satisfactory to the Architect, and thereafter shall be, subject to the provisions of Article 10 of the Agreement, and be strictly adhered to by the contractor.

N. Procedure for preparing, forwarding, checking and returning of all shop drawings shall be generally as follows: The contractor shall himself, or make available to his subcontractor the necessary contract documents and have them, determine dimensions and conditions in the field, particularly with reference to coordination with other trades or work under other contracts. He shall prepare himself, or direct his subcontractors to prepare shop drawings for submission to the Architect, in accordance with the requirements of these “General Conditions.He shall also direct his subcontractors to, “Ring-Up” corrections made on all resubmissions for approval, so as to be readily seen, and that the symbol “Sub” be used to identify a subcontractor as the source of the correction or information that has been added. The contractor shall:



Project No. 4587


1. Review and be responsible for information shown on subcontractor’s shop and installation drawings and manufacturer’s data, and also for conforming to contract documents.

2. “Ring Up” corrections made on all submissions for approval, so as to be readily seen and that the symbol “GC” or other trade be used to indicate that the correction and/or information added was made by respective contractor.

3. Clearly designate which trade is to perform the work when the use of “Work by Others”, or other similar phrases are indicated on the drawings before submission to the Architect.

O. In order to expedite shop drawings procedures, the contractor shall write a bi-weekly shop drawing status letter to the Architect, containing the following subject matter:

1. A list of all shop drawings which have been sent to but not returned giving name of the subcontractor, if applicable, drawing number, title and date of submission.

2. An indication of the desired priority of the return, if necessary.3. The status letter shall be prepared and sent at a given time, preferably Friday afternoon,

to enable the Corporation to receive the letter on Monday morning. This procedure shall be maintained throughout the active shop drawing period of constructions.

1.7 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. NEWFORMA PROJECT CENTER

1. General: As defined in the owner-architect agreement, the design team shall be utilizing the Newforma Project Center to process submittals. To expedite the review process, the Contractor shall process submittals electronically through Newforma. Newforma is a collaborative web environment that will transmit electronic submittals between the Contractor and Architect, as opposed to other methods such as email. FTP or paper, which will expedites and organizes the review process between the Construction and Design Teams

2. The Contractor shall prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections and drawings in coordination with the Submittal Schedule.

3. Shop Drawings will be delivered through Newforma in PDF format. The Shop Drawings shall be packaged to assist the electronic review process on a computer screen. This includes keeping the number of pages to a minimum. Shop Drawings shall be broken down into 20 page increments and issued under separate submittal numbers.

B. The Architect will maintain electronic submittal files contained within the Project Center up to 30 days of the return submission by the Architect.

1.8 SUBMITTAL LOGS

A. The Contractor shall keep an updated log of all shop drawings, samples, and each product data at the field office, at all times. Such log shall be available for inspection by the Owner and his consultants at all times.



Project No. 4587


1.9 DIVISION 1 - SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to Owner 3 bound copies of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), as described under the General conditions with alphabetical list of hazardous materials to be brought to site, within 10 consecutive calendar days of Notice to Proceed.

B. Submit to Owner 3 copies of Comprehensive Safety Program within 10 consecutive calendar days of Notice to Proceed described under Section 01100, Special Project Procedures.

C. Evidence that temporary enclosure material complies with NFPA 701 Standards prior to installation described under Section 01500, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.

1.10 TESTING AND CERTIFICATIONS

A. Certifications:

1. Provide three (3) certifications as required by various technical sections on the Contractor’s letterhead stationary. Certifications shall be identified to this Project, dated and bear Contractor’s signature in the same format used for the Agreement.Certifications shall clearly identify the materials in reference and shall state that the material and the intended installation methods, where applicable, are in compliance with the Contract documents for this project. Attach manufacturer’s affidavits where applicable.

1.11 COST BREAKDOWN

A. The Contractor shall submit 3 copies of his cost breakdown on the form attached under “Schedules, Part 3, Execution” of this Section. The labor component of each line item should correspond to the actual man-hours anticipated and the prevailing wage rates of the respective trade. General Conditions and Mobilization cost are to be included in the hard cost line items, and not to be shown separately as a line item.

1.12 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS

A. The Contractor shall provide monthly progress photographs stipulated in the “General Requirements for all Contractors, Division 1". He shall employ and pay for the services of a competent, commercial photographer to take these photographs. These photographs are to show conditions prior to start of the project work, progress and complete project work in such numbers, and from such locations and viewpoints directed by the Construction Manager, to properly describe the state of work.

B. The Contractor shall submit three (3) 8"x10" glossy prints of each negative, mounted with a 1" muslin binding flap on the left side. They shall be marked on the back with the date of exposure, title of the project, and the specific location,




Project No. 4587

CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS

015000 - 1

SECTION 015000 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 All Division 1 - General Requirements Sections including this one shall be considered part of each Contract of this Project.


A. Contractors Responsibility.

B. Temporary Utilities.

C. Hoists, Hoist ways, and Facility Elevators.

D. Scaffolding.

E. Temporary Construction Site Barriers.

F. Security.

G. Rubbish Removal.

H. Site Access.

I. Parking.

J. Bulletin Board.

K. Signage.

L. Identification of Workmen.

M. Field Offices.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. General Conditions of this Contract.

B. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: Removal Work.



Project No. 4587


015000 - 2

1.4 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY

A. Perform work in accordance with the Life Safety Code (NFPA 101 and NFPA 241), JACHO’s Interim Life Safety Measures, and the Institution’s safety regulations. Specific safety measures described within Contract Documents in no way alleviate Contractors from the responsibility of providing and maintaining a safe site.

1.5 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A. Temporary Power and Light.

1. The Institution will provide power source.2. Power will be supplied by the existing outlets.

B. Sanitary Facilities - Sanitary facilities shall be provided by the facility.

1. Public toilets are assigned to the contractor inside the contract limit line. They shall be used in a proper and sanitary manner. The facility will supply, clean and maintain such toilets in a sanitary condition.

2. No contractor shall cause any sanitary nuisances to be committed by his employees in or about the work or in public areas. Each contractor shall enforce all sanitary regulations of the City and State Health Authorities.

1.6 HOIST, HOIST WAYS, AND FACILITY ELEVATORS

A. The general contractor shall provide hoist and hoist ways, as required.

B. When and where hoists or lifting equipment are required by individual contractors, they shall provide, operate and maintain their own equipment in accordance with the provisions herein and within applicable Federal, State and City laws and regulations.

C. The Contractor providing hoists shall comply with the manufacturer’s specification and limitations applicable to the operations of all hoists in elevators. Where manufacturer’s specifications are not available, the limitations assigned to the equipment shall be based on the determination of a professional engineer competent in the field.

D. Rated load capacities, recommended operating speeds, and the special hazard warnings or instructions shall be posted on cars and platforms.

E. Locations - No hoists shall be constructed at such locations that will interfere with or affect the work of other contractors. They shall be located at sufficient distance from the exterior walls, and be so protected as to prevent damage, staining or marring any permanent work.



Project No. 4587


015000 - 3

F. When it becomes necessary for the Contractor to employ lifting and/or rigging devices and methods that may impact on the structural stability of the building under construction; such lifting and rigging devices and methods shall be submitted for review prior to their installation and use in accordance with the shop drawing/submittal procedures described in these documents. The lifting and/or rigging devices and methods referred to shall include but not be limited to; cranes, hoists, rigging devices attached to the structure. Where engineering calculations are required, they shall be done and stamped by a licensed P.E.. All costs associated with the review process will be borne by the contractor.

G. Facility elevators shall be used by contractors ONLY AT TIMES DESIGNATED BY THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER.

1.7 SCAFFOLDING

A. The contractor shall furnish and securely set scaffolding as required for this work

B. All scaffolding shall be of good, sound materials, of adequate dimensions for its intended use and substantially braced and tied to insure absolute safety for those required to use it and shall be in full compliance with applicable codes, and OSHA rules and regulations.

C. Employees required to use scaffolding shall be instructed on their proper use.

D. Metal hooks and ropes on hanging scaffolds shall not be used to secure to existing parapets of the building. The Contractor must provide other means such as the use of beams secured down to the roof by heavy weights or secured to other structural members. No penetrations through the roof membrane will be allowed. The Contractor at his expense must repair all damages to the existing roof. All roofing guarantees must be maintained.

1.8 FENCES AND TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION PROTECTION

A. For common areas where the public-users of the hospital are directly adjacent to the work area, the contractor shall erect a portable gypsum board partition, unsecured to floor or ceiling, to act as a barrier to confine the work area. Gypsum board partition shall maintain 48" corridor minimum.

1.9 SECURITY

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for safeguarding and protecting his own work, personnel, material, tools and equipment. Each Contractor shall be solely responsible for any loss or damage to their property or operation.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible after the completion of work each day to secure the site. Any wind or precipitation damage resulting from the designated contractor’s failure to secure the site will be the responsibility of the designated contractor to pay any and all expenses required to correct such damage.



Project No. 4587


015000 - 4

1.10 RUBBISH REMOVAL

A. The General Contractor shall designate a location and provide the dumpster. All trade contractors shall bring their debris and waste materials to this dumpster. The General Contractor shall be responsible for removing the waste material on a daily basis.

B. All rubbish and debris removals, handling and sorting shall be in compliance with all applicable Federal, State and City laws and regulations.

C. The contractor stipulated in the “General Requirements for all Contracts Division 1", shall be responsible for the removal of all debris, rubbish, etc. from the site of project. He shall remove from the designated locations all piles of rubbish, debris, waste materials and wood crating daily and when directed by the Owner and shall cart them away from the project site. He shall employ and engage for this purpose an adequate force of laborers.

D. At the conclusion of the work, all erection plant, tools temporary structures and materials belonging to the contractor shall be promptly taken away.

E. In the event the contractor fails to maintain the premises in a neat condition acceptable to the Construction Manager, and postpones or delays in the removal of rubbish contrary to the direction of the Construction Manager, the Owner may order such rubbish or dirt removed by other parties, if in the opinion of the Owner this failure results in the clear and present danger of fire or personal injury. In such events, there shall be withheld from any payment to the contractor a sum determined by the Owner sufficient to cover the cost of removal by other parties.

F. Remove combustible debris from work site at the end of each work shift.

1.11 SITE ACCESS

A. Maintain clear access to fire exits, emergency routes, and emergency department at all times.

B. Maintain clear access on sidewalk, if applicable.

1.12 PARKING

A. No parking will be provided by the facility.

1.13 BULLETIN BOARD

A. Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain 2 bulletin boards at each construction area for “Right to Know” and other information legally required to be on constant display.

1.14 SAFETY SIGNAGE

A. Each contractor shall be responsible for providing construction signage. Signs shall comply with Article 5 of the Agreement, OSHA regulations and as described under 2.03 of this section.



Project No. 4587


015000 - 5

B. The sign information given under this Section is only a guide and in no way alleviates the Contractor’s responsibility to provide proper signage.

C. The General Contractor shall provide signage required under Section 02085, Asbestos Abatement.

1.15 IDENTIFICATION OF WORKMEN

A. Each contractor shall obtain for its workmen and superintendents, and its subcontractor employees with identification badges as provided by the Facility.

B. A dated list of names of each workman with his corresponding number shall be provided to the Construction Manager and recorded on the Daily Logs by each contractor and kept current as directed.

C. In event of any change of workmen, the respective contractor shall immediately report the changes of name of his workmen to the Construction Management.

D. Site access may be denied to those workmen who fail to abide by the identification of workmen requirements.

1.16 FIELD OFFICES

A. The contractor’s superintendent must carry a cellular phone and beeper on which he can be reached at all times.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION SITE BARRIERS

A. Non-Combustible Short Term Dust Enclosures - (1 working day or less)

1. Non-combustible materials such as plastic or canvas complying with NFPA 101 standards.

2. Duct tape.

B. Small openings and annular spaces: fire stop caulk or foam other non-combustible, removable caulking.

C. Existing doors or temporary doors used to separate site: duct tape.

2.2 BULLETIN BOARD

A. Provide one 3'-0" x 5'-0" wall hung cork board with wood or aluminum frame at each construction site entrance.



Project No. 4587


015000 - 6

2.3 SAFETY SIGNS

A. Manufacturers

1. Seton Identification Products.2. Or approved equal.3. Model numbers reflect Seton products.

B. Signs shall also appear in English, Spanish and the predominant language of workers with equivalent verbiage as appears under this Article.

C. Sign No. 106L (BSR)

1. Materials: Semi rigid butyrate.2. Color: red/black on white field.3. Verbiage: DANGER

Construction Area.4. Dimension: 20 x 14 inches.

D. Sign No. 643 (BSR)

1. Materials Semi rigid butyrate.2. Color: Blue on white field.3. Verbiage: NOTICE

Hard Hats Must Be WornIn This Area

4. Dimension: 14 x 10 inches.

E. Sign No.768

1. Material: Semi rigid butyrate.2. Color: Red lettering/yellow field, luminous.3. Verbiage: EXIT4. Dimensions: 10 x 14 inches.



Project No. 4587


015000 - 7

F. Sign No. 856

1. Materials: semi rigid butyrate.2. Color: white lettering/red field.3. Verbiage: No Smoking

Allowed In This Building/Construction SiteAt Any Time

Carrying Lighted Cigars, Pipes,or Cigarettes strictly Forbidden

4. Dimensions: 20 x 14 inches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION BARRIER

A. Plastic or Canvas enclosures (to be removed at the end of each work shift): Tape all edges securely.

B. Removal

1. Disassemble and remove dustproof partitions at the completion of the work upon the direction by the Construction Management. Repair surfaces and patch finishes to match existing where partitions had been erected.

C. Each Contractor is responsible for prevention and cleanup of dust at each construction site egress.

3.2 BULLETIN BOARD

A. Place bulletin board(s) where directed by Construction Management.

3.3 SCHEDULES

A. Bilingual Safety Signs

Verbiage Quantity LocationDanger - Construction Area 2 min. At construction site entryNotice - Hard Hats.... 2 min. At construction site entryExit 2 min. Throughout construction site and at

existing, altered, or new exit from construction site.

No Smoking.... 2 min. Throughout construction site.




Project No. 4587

INTERIM LIFE SAFETY MEASURES (ILSM) 015010 - 1

SECTION 015010 - INTERIM LIFE SAFETY MEASURES (ILSM)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS

A. Specific administrative and procedural minimum actions are specified in this section, as extensions of provisions in General Conditions and other Contract Documents. These requirements have been included for special purposes as indicated. Nothing in this section is intended to limit types and amounts of temporary work required, and no omissions from this section will be recognized as an indication by Architect or Engineer that such temporary activity is not required for successful completion of the work and compliance with requirements of Contract Documents.

B. Implementation of the Interim Life Safety Measures shall be required in or adjacent to all construction areas. ILSM apply to all personnel. Implementation of ILSM shall begin upon project commencement, and be continuous through project completion.

C. The ILSM are intended to provide a level of life safety comparable to that described in chapters 1-7, 31 and the applicable occupancy chapters of latest adopted edition of the Life Safety Code (NFPA 101).

1.3 WORK SITE SAFETY AND INFECTION CONTROL

A. It is the Contractor's responsibility to maintain Interim Life Safety Measures (ILSM) in and Infection Control Measures (ICM) around the job site to protect the Hospital, its staff, patients and visitors from potential harm incidental to the work. This includes controlling access, maintaining fire safety measures and equipment and securing tools, equipment and materials. In addition to complying with all State, Federal and Local laws and regulations. Any ILSM and ICM issues which the Contractor identifies but with which he is not able, by virtue of capability or authority, to control must be documented and brought to the attention of the Director of Facilities Management immediately.

B. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to provide and maintain ICM within the project area limit of work and all areas adjacent to and affected by construction. This includes but is not limited to the following key elements:

1. The impact of disrupting essential services to patients and employees.2. Placement of effective barriers to protect occupants/patients of the facilities from

transmission of airborne contaminants such as Aspergillus sp from the limit of work to the surroundings areas.



Project No. 4587


a. Air handling and ventilation needs in surgical services, airborne infection isolation and protective environment rooms, laboratories, local exhaust systems for hazardous agents, and other special areas.

b. Consideration of the domestic water system to limit Legionella sp. And waterborne opportunistic pathogens

1.4 PURPOSE

A. To provide a safe environment during construction.

B. To make staff aware of the increased hazard potential within the construction area.

C. To minimize exposure of patients to construction hazards and airborne contaminants.

D. Ensure free and unobstructed exits. Personnel to receive additional training when alternative exits are designated. Buildings or areas under construction must maintain escape routes for construction workers at all times. Means of exiting construction areas are inspected daily.

E. Ensure free and unobstructed access to emergency services and for fire, police, and other emergency forces.

F. Ensure fire alarm, detection, and suppression systems are in good working order. A temporary but equivalent system shall be provided when any fire system is impaired. Temporary systems must be inspected and tested monthly.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit completed copy of daily checklist included at the end of this section to Owner with copies of weekly progress reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. All exits will remain unobstructed and usable. All personnel will receive training if alternative exits must be utilized. Such exits will be clearly marked with approve signs. Existing egress routes obstructed from use due to Work shall be rerouted to a proper egress path with appropiate exit singage to an exit. Egress path exit signage leading occupants toward obstructed exits within the Construction Area shall be removed and alternate routing shall be clearly marked and must be approved by the Authority Having Juristiction.

B. Construction area will be properly restricted from the rest of the building operations.

C. Construction area will be maintained in a clean and fire safe manner. Trash shall be removed on a daily basis and provide additional fire-fighting equipment and train personnel in its use.

D. Alternate routes for public access and egress will be provided if normal access routes are affected. Maintain free and unobstructed access to Emergency Department services.



Project No. 4587


E. Roads and walkways will be kept passable and safe. Fire lanes will be maintained for emergency vehicle access at all times.

F. Before any life safety systems are removed or put out of service, contingency plans will be implemented.

G. All penetrations of fire and smoke walls, and floor slabs shall be properly sealed at the end of each work shift.

H. Where required, temporary life safety systems will be provided, equivalent to the permanent systems. These systems must be inspected and tested monthly.

I. Temporary construction partitions must be smoke tight, built of noncombustible materials, and be of the same or greater smoke and/or fire rating as permanent construction in the area.

J. Openings in temporary partitions shall be protected with solid core wood or hollow metal doors with closers.

K. Contractor shall strictly enforce a no smoking policy in all work sites. All employees of Contractors shall strictly observe the hospital smoking policy. Smoking shall be prohibited in or adjacent to all construction areas by all personnel.

L. Develop and enforce storage, housekeeping, and debris removal policies and procedures, which reduce flammable and combustible fire load.

M. A minimum of two fire drills per shift per quarter will be held, at least one in the construction area.

N. Hazard surveillance of grounds, buildings, construction areas, storage and field offices will be conducted daily.

O. Proper storage facilities for flammable and hazardous materials shall be provided.

P. Contractors shall comply with state, local and OSHA regulations.

Q. It will be the responsibility of the Plant Engineering Department to inform all contractors of these Life Safety measures for their prospective projects and document them in preconstruction meeting minutes.

R. Life safety will be an agenda item for all project meetings until the project is complete.

S. The Contractor will be responsible for ILSM measures set forth in the project specifications and meeting minutes.

T. Train personnel to compensate for impaired structural or compartmentalization features of fire safety.

U. Conduct organization wide safety education programs to promote an awareness of Life Safety Code deficiencies, construction hazards, and Interim Life Safety Measures.

V. The Hospital Fire and Safety organization will provide backup measures including:



Project No. 4587


1. Perform safety inspections and provide proper documentation that Interim Life Safety Measures are in place.

2. Perform additional fire drills and staff training in affected areas.3. Implement contingency plans when there is any interruption to a life safety system.4. Check to assure proper storage of flammable and hazardous materials, and assure

Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) are available, along with a chemical inventory "Work Place Chemical List" (WPCL).

5. Document any deficiencies and report them to appropriate project manager for immediate correction.

6. Provide the appropriate phone numbers to call to report any emergency, and obtain emergency phone numbers of all contractors.

7. Familiarize contractors with the location of fire alarm pull stations, fire extinguishers, and chemicals that they may come in contact with while working in the Hospital.

PART 4 - END OF SECTION 015010



Project No. 4587

INFECTION CONTROL MEASURES DURING CONSTRUCTION

015020 - 1

SECTION 015020 - INFECTION CONTROL MEASURES DURING CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 PURPOSE

A. To minimize the risk to the hospital population of infection by organisms released into the air and water as a result of construction activity in the building. Construction dust may carry fungal spores which, when inhaled by immuno-compromised patients, can cause a potentially deadly form of pneumonia called aspergillosis. Healthy people are not vulnerable to aspergillosis.

1.2 LEVEL OF CONTROL

A. There are four levels of stringency of Infection Control requirements which have been determined in the Hospital Infection Control Manual Section, “Construction and Renovation Policy and Procedures, Infection Control.” These levels are based on the construction activity being performed and the population affected. They range from Class I (least stringent) to Class IV (most stringent). See drawings for project Class.

1.3 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. Prior to beginning of demolition/construction, project-specific infection control measures shall be outlined at a pre-construction conference. These measures shall be followed by all contractors.

1.4 QUALITY CONTROL

A. The Hospital Occupational Safety Department will perform visual inspections and monitor dust particle and biological counts in vicinity of construction. Whenever a hazardous infection control deficiency occurs, the contractor will take immediate action to correct such deficiency. Failure to do so will result in work on the project being stopped until the deficiency is corrected. Hospital is not responsible for any costs incurred due to this work stoppage. Continued violations of infection control procedures may affect status as a responsible contractor for bidding future work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONSTRUCTION BARRIER MATERIALS:

A. Sheet Plastic: Fire retardant polyethylene, 6-mil thickness, as manufactured by Poly-America, Grand Prairie, TX or approved equal.

B. Drywall with metal studs.



Project No. 4587


015020 - 2

C. Solid Core wood doors in metal frames.

D. Portable dust containment system, such as “ZipWall” as manufactured by Zip Wall LLC, Cambridge, Massachusetts; “Kontrol Kube”, as manufactured by Fiberlock Technologies, Inc., at Cambridge, Massachusetts; or approved equal.

2.2 HEPA FILTERED VENTILATION UNITS

A. HEPA equipped air filtration units such as those manufactured by “HEPA Aire”, Model PAS 2000 HC or Model PAS 1000 HC equipped air filtration units or approved equal. Contractor shall provide HEPA filter, primary and secondary filters and replace as needed.

2.3 EXHAUST HOSES

A. Heavy duty, flexible steel reinforced; Ventilation Blower Hose, WPG as manufactured by Federal Hose Mtg. Co Painsville, Ohio 44077 or approved equal.

2.4 ADHESIVE WALK-OFF MATS

A. Minimum size mats of 24 inches X 36 inches as manufactured by 3M, St. Paul, MN 55144, or approved equal.

2.5 HVAC FILTERS

A. 2” thick pleated air filters, model #FME-40 as manufactured by Purolator, or approved equal. Minimum efficiency 25/35% with minimum of 10 pleats per foot.

2.6 DUCTWORK DISINFECTANT/FUNGICIDE

A. Microban as manufactured by Microban Systems, Inc. of Braddock, PA.

B. Copper –8- Quinolinolate as manufactured by Maag Chemical of Vero Beach, FL.

C. Approved Equal

2.7 HEPA VACUUM

A. Commercial/industrial vacuum designed with integral HEPA filter, such as Pullman-Holt model 45 HEPA vacuum; Euroclean GD930-HSP HEPA vacuum; or equal.



Project No. 4587


015020 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ENCLOSURE

A. The project site must be completely contained with construction barriers extending from floor to underside of deck. Barriers may be sealed tightly against a suspended ceiling in lieu of underside of deck at the discretion of the Project Manager, in consultation with the Infection Control department. All penetrations into the construction area must be sealed. All joints in barriers shall be taped or caulked.

B. Openings in drywall construction barriers shall consist of gasketed doors with self-closing and latching hardware.

C. Openings in polyethylene barriers shall consist of polyethylene flaps, overlapping a minimum of 24” and weighted to stay closed, or mechanical zippers.

D. There shall be an anteroom or double entrance opening at all construction entrances from within the building. The anteroom will be adequately sized to allow one door or flap to close before the second is opened. It will also allow for donning and removal of protective clothing.

E. All existing doors between the construction site and adjacent spaces shall be sealed with duct tape.

F. Walk-off mats shall be placed at every construction entrance, both inside and outside the area. Adhesive mats shall be used outside the barriers and carpet mats shall be used inside the barriers. Mats shall be of sufficient size so as to make it impossible to exit the construction area without walking across the mats.

3.2 VENTILATION

A. Negative pressure shall be maintained at all times within the construction area.

B. Supply air ducts shall be blocked off as required to maintain negative pressure. Return and exhaust air ducts shall be covered with 2” thick pleated air filters.

C. Where existing HVAC system is insufficient to create negative air flow, contractor shall provide HEPA filtered ventilation units, ducted to outside.

D. Hospital Occupational Safety will monitor air pressure to ensure negative flow.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Walk-off dust mats must be HEPA-vacuumed or the top sheet peeled off at least twice per shift and at the end of the workday, or as required to maintain effectiveness. Any dust tracked outside of the construction area shall be vacuumed immediately.

B. When construction is in an occupied area, the construction area shall be vacuumed or damp-mopped at least at the end of each shift, minimum three times in any 24-hour period. Any visible dust or dirt shall be cleaned up immediately.



Project No. 4587


015020 - 4

C. When construction is segregated from occupied areas, the area outside the construction area shall be vacuumed or damp-mopped at least at the end of each shift, minimum three times in any 24-hour period. Any visible dust or dirt shall be cleaned up immediately.

3.4 CLEANING INSIDE WALLS

A. During partition construction, floor tracks shall be vacuumed and sprayed with bleach solution prior to the wall being closed up. See Section 092900, “Gypsum Board Assemblies.”

3.5 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

A. During all dust-producing work, demolition work, or work in ceilings, contractors shall wear disposable shoe covers and coveralls over their clothing. Protective garb shall be removed any time the worker leaves the construction site. Used coveralls and shoe covers shall be placed in a sealed plastic bag for disposal by the contractor.

B. When working in the Operating Room area, contractors may not go from the construction area into the restricted access OR corridors. If access into a restricted area is absolutely necessary, contractor must put on a cover gown and head covering prior to entering the restricted area. If the contractor is already wearing head/shoe/clothing cover because he has been engaged in dust-producing work within the construction area, he must remove all soiled covers and replace them with clean covers prior to exiting the construction area. A vestibule shall be created within the construction barriers for this purpose. General Contractor shall be responsible for providing all cover garb.

3.6 DEBRIS REMOVAL

A. Removal of construction debris shall occur daily. Any debris transportation through hospital corridors shall occur before 7:00am or after 4:30pm. Transport materials in tightly sealed, covered containers. Containers shall be fitted with clean polyethylene covers, closed at perimeter by wire tying or taping. Before leaving construction area, container shall be wiped clean to prevent tracking of dust. Immediately after passage of cart, the corridor shall be vacuumed with a HEPA-filtered vacuum cleaner or damp-mopped.

3.7 CEILING TILE REMOVAL OUTSIDE OF CONSTRUCTION AREA

A. Any ceiling access panels opened for investigation beyond sealed areas shall be replaced immediately when unattended. Any ceiling access remaining open for work shall be enclosed within a sealed temporary portable enclosure fitted tight to ceiling.



Project No. 4587


015020 - 5

3.8 EXTERIOR OPENINGS IN THE BUILDING SHALL BE SEALED TO PREVENT ENTRY BY BIRDS OR INSECTS. EXTERIOR DOORS SHALL REMAIN CLOSED WHEN NOT ACTUALLY IN USE.

3.9 CAPPING OF WATER PIPING

A. Cap unused water pipe branches no more than 12” from main line.

3.10 STORAGE

A. Construction materials such as drywall and ceiling tiles shall be stored in clean, dry areas to prevent the growth of bacteria and fungi. Ductwork will be shipped and stored with the ends sealed. Ductwork ends will remain sealed until connected.

3.11 FINAL CLEANING

A. Contractor shall be responsible for the following at project completion:

B. Vacuum and clean all surfaces in the construction area, rendering them free of dust prior to the removal of isolation barriers.

C. Remove barrier materials carefully to minimize spread of dust and dirt. (Barriers should be wet-wiped, HEPA-vacuumed or water-misted prior to disassembly and discarded as construction debris.)

D. Remove blockages from HVAC diffusers. Clean ductwork interior with Microban or Copper –8- Quinolinolate. Balance the HVAC system to design specifications.

E. Alert Hospital project manager to have Environmental Services do Hospital cleaning prior to occupancy.




Project No. 4587

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 016000 - 1

SECTION 016000 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 All Division 1 - General Requirements Sections including this one shall be considered part of each Contract of this Project.


A. Delivery, Storage, and Handling.

B. Unincorporated Materials.

C. Product Options and Substitutes.

D. Removed and Surplus Materials.


A. General Conditions of this Contract.

B. Section 01300 - Submittals.

1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. The contractor shall submit a Procurement schedule within 10 ccd’s after the Notice to Proceed.

B. When the Owner requires, the Contractor shall furnish a copy of each material order, indicating date of order and quantity of material, and shall also notify the Owner if material has been delivered to the site and in what quantities.

C. Ample Quantities - The Contractor shall deliver materials in ample quantities to insure the most speedy and uninterrupted progress of the work so as to complete the work within the contract time.

D. Manufacturer’s containers shall be delivered with unbroken seals and shall bear proper labels.

E. The Contractor shall coordinate deliveries in order to avoid delay in, or impeding the progress of the work of any related Contractor.

F. Stacking - All materials shall be properly stacked in convenient places adjacent to the site, or where directed, and protected in a satisfactory manner.

G. Overloading - If authority is given to store materials in any part of the building area, they shall be so stored as to cause no overloading.



Project No. 4587


H. No Interference - If it becomes necessary to remove and restack materials to avoid impeding the progress of any part of the work or interfering with the work to be done by any other Contractor, the Contractor shall remove and restack such materials at no additional cost to the Owner.

I. Remove broken, damaged, or unlabeled products from project site immediately.

J. Protect materials and accessories from dampness and wetting.

K. Protect the installed work of other trades and protect the existing construction.

1.5 UNINCORPORATED MATERIALS

A. Progress Payments for materials in advance of their Incorporation in the Work

1. To better insure the availability of selected materials, fixtures and equipment when needed for the work the Owner may authorize progress payment for certain work, but only in strict accordance with and subject to all terms and conditions set forth in this condition, unless another method of payment is elsewhere provided in the Specifications for specified materials, fixtures or equipment.

2. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner a written request in quadruplicate, for payment for materials purchased for which he desires to be paid prior to their actual incorporation in the work. The request shall be accompanied by a schedule of the types and qualities of material, and shall state whether such materials are to be stored on or off the site.

3. If the materials are to be stored off the site, they shall be stored at a place other than the Contractor’s premises (except with the written consent of the Owner) and under the conditions prescribed or approved by the Owner.

4. The Contractor shall set apart and separately store at the place or places of storage all materials and shall clearly mark same “PROPERTY OF THE NEW YORK CITY HEALTH AND HOSPITALS CORPORATION” and further, shall not at any time move any of said materials to another off-site place of storage without the prior written consent of the Owner). Materials may be removed from their place of storage off the site for incorporation in the work upon approval of the Owner.

5. If the materials are to be stored at the site, they shall be stored at such locations as shall be designated by the Owner and only in such quantities as, in the opinion of the Owner, will not interfere with the proper performance of the work by the Contractor or by other Contractors then engaged in performing work on the site. Such materials shall not be removed from their place of storage on the site except for incorporation in the work, without approval of the Owner.

B. Insurance

1. Storage Off Site: If the materials are stored off the site and until such time as they are incorporated in the work, the Contractor shall fully insure such materials against any and all risks of destruction, damage or loss including but not limited to fire, theft, and any other casualty of happening. The policy of insurance shall be in such terms and amounts as shall be approved by the president and shall be placed with a company duly licensed to do business in the State of New York. The Contractor shall deliver the original and one copy of such policy and policies marked “Full Paid” to the president.



Project No. 4587


2. Storage on Site: Where the materials are stored at the site, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence to Owner that they are properly insured against loss, by endorsement or otherwise, under the policy or losses to materials owned or installed by him. The coverage against windstorm, hail, explosion and riot attending a strike, civil commotion, aircraft, vehicles and smoke.

C. All cost, charges and expenses arising out of the storage of such materials, shall be paid by the Contractor and the Owner hereby reserves the right to retain out of any partial or final payment made under the contract an amount sufficient to cover such costs, charges and expenses with the understanding that the Corporation shall have and may exercise any and all other remedies of law for the recovery of such costs, charges and expenses and the Contractor shall not make any claim or demand for compensation therefore.

D. The Contractor shall pay any and all cost of handling and delivery of materials, from the place of storage to the site of the work, and the Owner shall have the right to retain from any progress or final payment an amount sufficient to cover the cost of such handling and delivery.

E. In the event that the whole or any part of these materials are lost, damaged or destroyed in advance of their satisfactory incorporation in the work, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner, and at his own cost, shall replace such loss with items of the same quality. The Owner will reimburse the Contractor for the cost of the replaced material to the extent, and only to the extent, of the money actually received by the Owner under the policies of insurance herein before referred to. Until such times as the materials are replaced, the president will deduct from the value of the stored materials or from any other money due under the contract, the amount paid to the Contractor for such lost, damaged or destroyed materials.

F. Should any of the material paid for by the Owner hereunder be subsequently rejected or incorporated in the work in a manner or by a method not in accordance with the Contract and Specifications, the Contractor shall remove and replace such defective or improperly incorporated materials with materials complying with the Contract and Specifications. Until such materials are replaced, the Owner will deduct from the value of the stored materials or from any other money due the Contractor, the amount paid by the Owner for such rejected or improperly incorporated materials.

G. Payment for the cost of materials made here under shall not be deemed to be an acceptance of such materials as being in accordance with the Contract Documents, and the Contractor always retains and must comply with his duty to deliver to the store and properly incorporate in the work only materials which comply with the Contract Documents.

H. The Contractor shall retain any and all risks in connection with the damage, destruction or loss of the materials paid for hereunder to the time of delivery of the same to the site of the work and their proper incorporation in the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

I. The Contractor shall comply with all laws and the regulations of any governmental body or agency pertaining to the priority purchase, allocation and use of the materials.

J. When requesting payment for such materials, the Contractor shall submit authenticated DOCUMENTS of TITLE such as bills of sale, invoices or warehouse receipts, all in quadruplicate. The executed bills of sale shall TRANSFER TITLE to the materials from the Contractor to the New York City Health and Hospitals Corporation (in the event that the invoices state that material has been purchased by a subcontractor, bills of sale in quadruplicate will also be required transferring title to the materials from subcontractor to the Contractor.)



Project No. 4587


K. The Contractor shall include in each succeeding progress requisition a summary of materials stored which shall set forth the quantity and value of materials in storage, on or off the site, at the end of each preceding estimate period: (1) the amount removed for incorporation in the work; and (2) the quantity and value of materials delivered during the current period and the total value of materials on hand for which payment thereof will be included in the current payment estimate.

L. Upon proof to the satisfaction of the Owner of the actual cost of such materials and upon submission of proper proof of title as required under paragraph “10" payment will be made to the extent of 85%, provided however, that the cost so verified, established and approved shall not exceed the estimated cost of such materials included in the approved detailed breakdown estimate submitted in accordance with Article 46 of the Agreement; if it does not, the Owner will pay only 85% of the approved estimated cost.

M. Upon the incorporation in the work of any such materials which have been paid for in advance of such incorporation in accordance with the foregoing provisions, payment will be made for such materials incorporated in the work pursuant to requirements “12" stated herein.

1.6 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS

A. Local Laws - All materials, appliances and types or methods of construction shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents, and shall in no event be less than that necessary to conform to the requirements of the Administrative Code and the Charter of the City of New York.

B. Approval of Manufacturers - the names of proposed manufacturers, material men, and dealers who are to furnish materials, fixtures, equipment, appliances or other fittings shall be submitted to the Construction Manager for approval, as early as possible, to afford proper investigation and checking.

C. Repute of Manufacturer - No manufacturer will be approved for any materials to be furnished under the Contract unless he shall be of good reputation, shall have a plant of ample capacity and shall have successfully produced similar products.

D. All transactions with the manufacturer or subcontractors shall be through the Contractor unless the Contractor shall request in writing to the Owner that the manufacturer or subcontractor deal directly with the Owner. Any such transaction shall not in any way release the Contractor from his full responsibility under the Contract. All materials, fixtures, fittings, supplies and equipment finished under the Contract shall be new and unused, of standard first-grade quality and of the best workmanship and design. Where existing work is removed or disturbed, all replacement materials shall match existing unless prior approval for variance is given in writing by the Owner.

E. Information to Suppliers - In asking for prices on materials under any item of the Contract, the Contractor shall provide the manufacturer or dealer with such complete information from the Contract Documents as may in any case be necessary, and in every case he shall inform the manufacturers or dealer of all general conditions and requirements herein contained.



Project No. 4587


F. Samples

1. The approval of samples will be given as promptly as possible, and shall be only for the characteristic color, texture, strength, or other feature of the material named in such approval, and not other. When this approval is issued by the Architect it is done with the distinct completely comply with the Specifications, the determination of which may be made at some later date by a laboratory test or by other procedures. Use of material will be permitted only as long as the quality remains equal to the approved sample and complies in every respect with the Specifications, and the colors and textures of the samples on file with the Owner for the project.

2. The Owner will be the final judge as to acceptability of laboratory test data and performance in service of materials, submitted by the Contractor to the Owner. The Owner will select and designate all persons, firms and corporations to make or witness each and every inspection, test or analysis, with or without reports.

3. The Contractor shall give notice in writing to the Owner sufficiently in advance of his intention to commence the manufacture or preparation of materials especially manufactured or prepared for use in or as part of the permanent construction such notice shall contain a request for inspection, the date of commencement and the expected date of completion of the manufacture or preparation of materials. Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner may arrange to have a representative present at such times during the manufacture as may be necessary to inspect the materials, or will notify the Contractor that inspection will be waived.

4. No shipping Before Inspection - The Contractor shall comply with the foregoing before shipping any materials.

5. Testing Compliance - The testing personnel shall make the necessary inspections and tests, and the reports thereof shall be in such form as will facilitate checking to determine compliance with the Specifications, indicating thereon all and/or test data and interpreted results thereof.

6. Reports - Six (6) copies of the reports shall be submitted and authoritative certification thereof must be furnished to the Owner as a prerequisite for acceptance of any material or equipment.

7. Rejections - If, in making any test it is ascertained by the Owner that the material or equipment does not comply with the Specifications, the Contractor will be notified thereof, and he will be directed to refrain from delivering said materials or equipment, or to promptly remove it from the work and replace it without cost to the Owner.

8. Upon rejection of any material or equipment submitted as the equivalent of that specifically named in the Specifications, the Contractor shall immediately proceed to furnish the designated material or equipment.

9. Costs of Tests Borne by Owner - Where the Corporation makes tests to determine compliance with the Specifications regarding materials or equipment and where such compliance is ascertained as a result thereof, the Corporation will bear the cost of such tests if not defective.

10. Costs of Tests Borne by Contractor - Where tests are specifically called for in the Specifications to be made by the Contractor, the cost thereof shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be deemed to be included in the Contract price. The expenses of the testing personnel assigned by the Corporation shall not be the Contractor’s obligation. The cost incurred in the making of tests on materials and equipment submitted by the Contractor as the equivalent of that specifically named in the Specifications and rejected for non-compliance shall be borne by the Contractor.



Project No. 4587


1.7 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. The Contractor shall propose products meeting standards specified to the Architect for approval.

B. For products naming several manufacturers, select any one of products which complies with the technical Specifications. Materials and equipment which are, in the opinion of the Owner, the equivalent to those specified, may be accepted.

1.8 REMOVED AND SURPLUS MATERIALS

A. All existing products removed in the process of the work under this contract shall remain the property of the Contractor. The Construction Manager will examine materials or other accessories, etc. removed and determine which, if any shall be retained by the Corporation.

B. Each Contractor shall move and store materials, etc. that is to remain the property of the Corporation where directed by the Construction Manager. All other materials, etc. shall be removed and be disposed of as provided here under.

C. Surplus Materials Removal

1. The Contractor shall remove from the site all of his surplus materials when no further need thereof develops.




Project No. 4587

CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 017000 - 1

SECTION 017000 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 All Division 1 - General Requirements Sections, including this one, shall be considered part of each Contract of this Project.


A. Cleaning.

B. Adjusting.

C. Record Drawings.

D. Record Shop Drawings.

E. Warranties.



B. Section 013000, Submittals.

1.4 CLEANING

A. The contractor shall execute final cleaning prior to final inspection, including the following:

1. Clean interior of window and glass; surfaces exposed to view; 2. Clean room and all equipment and fixtures to a broom-finish condition.3. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site.

1.5 RECORD SHOP DRAWINGS

A. In addition to the drawings required under 1.06 of this section, the Contractor shall submit a list of all approved shop drawings of the work as installed. From this list the Designer will select the drawings he desires for permanent records. The Contractor shall furnish these in a bound set to the Corporation.

B. Record Shop Drawings - If work performed by the contractor is at a variance with the shop drawings, the Contractor shall furnish at his expense to the Owner, subject to his approval, before final payment, revised shop drawings of all such work indicating changes and corrections occurring in the work as actually completed and installed.



Project No. 4587

CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 017000 - 2

1.6 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. At the conclusion of the job, the contractor shall transfer all changes appearing on the Record Prints to the original contract drawings in a Computer-Aided Design (CAD) format. The Owner shall provide to the Contractor CAD Disk or CD containing the original contract drawings which the Contractor shall use to incorporate the As-built information. Two (2) copies of the As-Built information on CAD Disk or CD shall be delivered to the Owner in the same format as the original CAD construction design format.

B. In the event that the project was not done in CAD format, the Contractor shall transfer all the changes appearing on the Record Prints to two (2) sets of Mylar reproductions of the original contract tracings.

C. The As-Built drawings (Mylar reproductions or CAD drawings) shall be submitted to the Owner for approval as many times as required until they are approved as reflecting the As-Built installation. With each submittal of either Mylar reproductions, CAD Disk or CD, the Contractor shall also deliver two (2) sets of As-Built prints to the Owner.

D. All of the above shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

E. Final payment shall be contingent on completion of the above responsibility.

1.7 WARRANTIES

A. Provide copies of all required warranties and guarantees.




Project No. 4587

CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 - 1

SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building.

2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.

3. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for patching fire-rated construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to

structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting

and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services and systems will be disrupted.



Project No. 4587


6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure.

7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching procedures before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from the Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment.b. Fire separation assemblies.c. Air or smoke barriers.d. Fire-suppression systems.e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts.f. Control systems.g. Communication systems.h. Conveying systems.i. Electrical wiring systems.j. Operating systems of special construction.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:

a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.b. Membranes and flashings.c. Exterior curtain-wall construction.d. Equipment supports.e. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.f. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.



Project No. 4587


B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

C. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

C. Provide fire-resistive materials and firestopping materials that are compatible with existing and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities have jurisdiction for use in fire-resistive designs indicated.

D. Concrete Work shall conform to American Concrete Institute Standard 301 Specification. Use Portland Cement Type 1 per ASTM C150 and normal weight aggregates per ASTM C33. Design minimum to be 3000 lbs. normal weight concrete. Ready-mix to comply with ASTM C94.

E. Roofing Material, Flashing, and Roof Specialties Material: Selection should be on the compatibility with the existing Roofing System components and approved by the existing roofing manufacturer so they are in compliance with the existing warranty.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



Project No. 4587


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching in accordance with requirements of Division 01 Section "Summary

E. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

C. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.

4. Cutting of existing under slab vapor retarder due to the installation of plumbing work must be performed in a way so it can be patched in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

5. Remove sprayed fire-resistive materials or firestopping materials only to the extent necessary for the installation of new work.



Project No. 4587


6. Cutting of Existing Roofing System due to the installation of HVAC equipment, must be performed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Installation of the HVAC equipment must provide access for the repair of the roofing materials and flashing. Coordinate work with HVAC Contractor.

7. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

8. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

D. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition.

6. Where fire-resistive material thickness was reduced below that which is required to obtain fire-resistive rating indicated due to removal or damage during construction, activity must be patched or repaired according to their relevant specification Number.

7. Under slab vapor retarder Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape

8. Concrete Slabs on Grade: New concrete slabs must be doweled into the existing slabs using #4 Dowels @ 48” each side staggered with a minimum 6 “ embedment. Epoxy the dowels into the existing slab.

9. Elevated Concrete Slabs: Install a new concrete slab into an existing elevated concrete slab by continuously welding metal deck (with the same size, profile, and gauge as existing metal deck) to the existing metal deck with a minimum 3” overlap. New slab to be doweled into existing concrete slab with #4 dowels @ 24” O.C., all sides, with 6” minimum embedment and minimum (2) dowels per side. Epoxy the dowels into the existing slab.



Project No. 4587


10. Ceilings: In any area where new architectural, mechanical, electrical, or plumbing, work is indicated and any existing ceilings are to remain the contractor must patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

E. Roofing Repair Guidelines:

1. Only trained roof installer familiar with the products being used should perform the installation of roofing materials, flashing and manufacture roof specialties.

2. Adequate provisions should be made for the proper flashing of HVAC and electrical equipment including their service piping and conduits.

3. Perform all roof top work in accordance with NRCA and manufacturer details and instructions.

4. Install flashing to conform to standards set forth in the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and NRCA Manual. All roof top work (Removal of existing roofing, installation of roofing materials, flashing, equipment, etc.) should be performed in the same day.

5. All work should be performed in a way that it doesn’t void the existing warranty. After work is completed the contractor must arrange for a final inspection with the manufacturer to verify work was done per their instruction.

F. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials

3.4 FIRESTOPPING AND PATCHING OF EXISTING PENETRATIONS FOUND DURING THE COURSE OF THIS PROJECT

A. Coordinate with Contractor to confirm with interim Life Safety and JCAHO requirements. When each subcontractor reveals existing penetrations it shall be immediately reported to Contractor to verity that the condition is existing.

B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to patch existing penetrations revealed by all the subcontractors on this Project no later than the end of the work day that penetration is revealed.

1. This work shall be coordinated between General Construction Contractor and the subcontractor who revealed penetration to close penetration by the end of work day.

2. Annular spaces and blank openings smaller than 2 square feet in fire rated walls, floors, and ceiling shall be filled with approved firestopping materials using proper method as described under Section 078413, Penetration Firestopping and Section 010360, Contract Considerations.

3. Blank opening larger than 2 square feet in fire rated walls, floors, and ceilings shall be filled with the same material, and bearing the same fire rating or higher as materials in existing wall and floor. Method of integrating penetration fill shall comply with method to maintain fire rating. Refer to Section 01036, Contract Considerations.

3.5 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.



Project No. 4587


1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.




Project No. 4587

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

1.2 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building.

B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection , for dust control and , for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

C. Schedule of selective demolition activities with starting and ending dates for each activity.

D. Predemolition photographs or video.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Inventory of items that have been removed and salvaged.



Project No. 4587



A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. The General Contractor is responsible for the removal of less than or equal to ten (10) square feet and/or twenty five (25) linear feet of asbestos contaminated material.

2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials in quantities greater than those noted above will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

G. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.



Project No. 4587


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.

C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place.

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and

remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place.



Project No. 4587


3.4 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

4. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 1 (one) hour after flame-cutting operations.5. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.6. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in

Section 0174195000 "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls."

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

C. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items.2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.



Project No. 4587


D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition[ and cleaned] and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. and recycle or dispose of them according to Section 015000 "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls."

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas.3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will

convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 015000 "Construction Facilities and

Temporary Controls."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.




Project No. 4587

HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT 035416 - 1

SECTION 035416 - HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes polymer-modified, self-leveling, hydraulic cement underlayment for application below interior floor coverings.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of underlayment products required for this Project.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ventilation, ambient temperature and humidity, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance.

1. Place hydraulic cement underlayments only when ambient temperature and temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products :

1. ARDEX K 15 Premium Self-Leveling Underlayment2. Laticrete Drytek Levelex3. MAPEI Ultraplan 1 Plus

B. Hydraulic Cement Underlayment: Polymer-modified, self-leveling, hydraulic cement product that can be applied in minimum uniform thickness of 1/4 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined by ASTM C 219.



Project No. 4587


2. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

C. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F.

D. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and application indicated.

1. VOC Content: Provide primer with VOC content of 200 g/L.2. Low-Emitting Primer: Primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of

the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

E. Surface Sealer: Designed to reduce porosity as recommended by manufacturer for type of floor covering to be applied to underlayment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment.

2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.

B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions, laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.

1. Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

C. Nonporous Substrates: For ceramic tile, quarry tile, and terrazzo substrates, remove waxes, sealants, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond, and prepare surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer.



Project No. 4587


2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion to substrate and between coats.

3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment.

B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.

1. Apply a final layer without aggregate to product surface.2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.

E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.

F. Apply surface sealer at rate recommended by manufacturer.

G. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.




Project No. 4587

METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel framing and supports for countertops.2. Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions.3. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.

4. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following:1. Steel framing and supports for countertops.2. Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions.3. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.4. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections.



Project No. 4587


B. Shop/assembly drawings necessary to install the Strut System in compliance with the Contract Drawings.

1. Submit structural calculations for approval by the project engineer. Calculations may include, but are not limited to:

a. Description for design criteria.b. Stress and deflection analysis.c. Selection of framing members, fittings, and accessories


A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

B. Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless-steel manufacturers, certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."

C. Metal Framing system and components must be supplied from a single approved manufacturers.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.



Project No. 4587


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

D. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

E. "Rolled-Steel Floor Plate" Paragraph below specifies yield strength of 30 ksi (205 MPa); revise if higher strength is required.

F. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

G. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.

H. Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate [with abrasive granules rolled into surface] [or] [with abrasive material metallically bonded to steel].

I. Retain "Products" Subparagraph and list of manufacturers and products below to require specific products or a comparable product from other manufacturers.

J. Products in list below have abrasive material metallically bonded to steel.

K. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

L. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

M. "Slotted Channel Framing" Paragraph below describes typical component of metal channel framing systems such as that manufactured by Unistrut.

N. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.

1. Size of Channels: As indicated.2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial steel, Type B, with G90

coating; 0.108-inch nominal thickness.3. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B; 0.0966-

inch minimum thickness; coated with rust-inhibitive, baked-on, acrylic enamel.

O. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.



Project No. 4587


P. Strut System:

1. All channel members shall be fabricated from structural grade steel conforming to one of the following ASTM specifications: A101 1 SS GR 33 or A 653 GR 33

2. All fittings shall be fabricated from steel conforming to one of the following ASTM specifications: A 575, A 576, A 36 or A 635

3. All materials shall be protected from corrosion with a factory applied finish.4. All materials shall be stamped and identifiable by manufacturer and part number (where

appropriate). Materials that appear damaged, distressed, unidentifiable or rusted shall not be used and will not be accepted.

Q. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6.

R. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.

S. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.

T. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver.4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3; and, where indicated, flat washers.

D. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy [Group 1] [Group 2].

E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

F. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.



Project No. 4587


G. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.

H. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.

I. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

B. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.

C. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

G. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.



Project No. 4587


B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.

C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.



Project No. 4587


D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated.

E. Strut system:

1. For framing and support of miscellaneous medical equipment.

2. Source Limitations: Obtain all components including metal framing material, fittings and related accessories for a complete support strut system from a single manufacturer or manufacturer approved by the framing material manufacturer.

3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide strut system components as manufactured by Unistrut Corporation or approved equal.

4. System Components: Manufacturers’ standard load-bearing channels and accessories of type, size, shape, profile, and gauge as indicated, or as required to comply with performance intent indicated on the drawings. With each type of strut framing indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard, components, fittings, and accessories for applications indicated, as needed to provide a complete strut framing system.

5. Framing members: Provide type of framing member systems as required for conditions indicated on the drawings. Fabricate framing members, accurately and carefully cold formed, to size from strip steel. Provide channel series, closure strips, and ridges for secure attachment on each side.

6. Fittings: Fittings, unless noted otherwise, are punch press made from hot rolled, pickled and oiled steel plates or strip, complying with ASTM A 575, ASTM A 576, ASTM A 36, or ASTM A 635. Pickling of the steel produces a smooth surface free from scale. Provide fittings as indicated and as required to complete the system.

7. Clamps, Supports, Hangers, Electrical Accessories, Concrete Inserts: Provide as indicated and as required to complete the system.

8. Bolts, Nuts, Springs, and Washers: ASTM A307 and SAE J429, GR 2, (bolts), ASTM A 576 (nuts); with ASTM B 633, Type III, SC1 finish. Fabricate from steel bars, and after all machining operations are complete, thoroughly case harden. Provide manufacturer’s standard spring nuts and bolts designed to properly align for attachment of components with a quarter turn cross-wise, after insertion into the slotted opening in the channel, but preventing any further turning of the nut. Two serrated grooves in the top of the nut engage the inturned edges of the channel and, after bolting operations are completed, prevent any longitudinal movement of the bolt and nut within the framing member. Provide bolts and nuts with unified and American coarse screw threads. All bolts and nuts to have minimum tensile strength of 800 lbs. Provide as indicated and as required to complete the system.

9. Finishes: Provide factory applied finish as follows:

a. Channel:Rust inhibiting epoxy enamel paint applied by electrodeposition, after cleaning and phosphating and thoroughly baked.

b. Fittings: Polyester powder coat after cleaning and phosphating and thoroughly baked.

c. Color of Concealed Components: Manufacturers standardd. Color of Exposed to View Components: Spraayed enamel finish to match the

color of the ceiling suspension system.



Project No. 4587


e. Performance:1) Salt Spray per ASTM B117

a) Scribed: Exceed 400 hoursb) Unscribed: Exceed 600 hours

2) Nominal chalking at 1,000 hours per weatherometer G-23 test3) No checking at 1,000 hours per weatherometer G-23 test

2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.

2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.

C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated.

D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:

1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial

Blast Cleaning."3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance

Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."4. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M12.

B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, AA-M12C22A41.



Project No. 4587


2.9 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES.

1. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish

indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.3. Bright, Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.4. Dull Satin Finish: No. 6.5. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign

matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:

1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint.2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.



Project No. 4587


3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.




Project No. 4587

HEATING/COOLING UNIT COVERS 055819 - 1

SECTION 055819 - HEATING/COOLING UNIT COVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes heating-cooling unit enclosures.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including finishing materials.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for heating-cooling unit enclosures.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6-inch- square Samples of metal of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.


A. Coordination Drawings: For heating-cooling unit enclosures. Show dimensions of heating-cooling units, including locations of housing penetrations and attachments, and necessary clearances.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Heating-cooling unit enclosures shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without exceeding the allowable design working stress of materials involved and without exhibiting permanent deformation in any components:1. Live Loads: 100 lbf/sq. ft. or a concentrated load of 300 lbf on an area of 4 sq. in.,

whichever produces the greater stress.

2.2 HEATING-COOLING UNIT ENCLOSURES

A. Fabricate heating-cooling unit enclosures from metal of type and thickness indicated below:

1. Steel Sheet:

a. Framing: 0.105 inch.b. Sills and Stools: 0.075 inch.c. Front Panels and Bases: 0.060 inch.d. Concealed Panels and Trim: 0.036 inch.e. Finish: Powder coat.



Project No. 4587


B. Incorporate stiffeners or laminated backing using noncombustible materials as needed for strength and rigidity.

1. Fill space between stiffeners with sound-deadening insulation attached to face sheet with insulation adhesive unless otherwise indicated.

2. Coat concealed faces of metal panels more than 6 inches wide with a heavy coating of sound-deadening mastic applied at the minimum rate of 20 sq. ft./gal..

C. Provide louvers and grilles of size, type, and materials indicated.

D. Incorporate removable tops and fronts where indicated or needed for access to heating-cooling units and to piping, ductwork, controls, and electrical service.

2.3 SHEET METAL

A. Fabricate units from sheet metal without pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units.

B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated, cold-rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, exposed orelectrolytic zinc-coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, exposed.


A. Gaskets: As required to seal joints in heating-cooling unit enclosures; as recommended in writing by heating-cooling unit enclosure manufacturer.

B. Filler Metal and Electrodes: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as necessary for strength, corrosion resistance, and compatibility in fabricated items.

C. Fasteners: Fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with materials joined.

1. Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

D. Sound-Deadening Materials:

1. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket insulation complying with ASTM C 665, Type I, and passing ASTM E 136 test.

2. Mastic: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.


A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble heating-cooling unit enclosures in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.



Project No. 4587


B. Fold back exposed edges of unsupported sheet metal to form a 1/2-inch- wide hem on the concealed side, or ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch and support with concealed stiffeners.

C. Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing materials, or both, as needed to provide surface flatness equivalent to stretcher-leveled standard of flatness and sufficient strength for indicated use.

1. Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of adjoining sheets in flush alignment.

D. Where welding is indicated, weld joints and seams continuously. Grind, fill, and dress to produce smooth, flush, exposed surfaces in which joints are not visible after finishing is completed.

2.6 STEEL SHEET FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or with SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

B. Pretreatment: Immediately after cleaning, apply a conversion coating of type suited to organic coating applied over it.

C. Powder-Coat Finish: After cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-film thickness not less than 1.5 mils. Prepare, treat, and coat metal to comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place heating-cooling unit enclosures level and plumb and in alignment with adjacent construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install heating-cooling unit enclosures.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible.

C. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and openings for sealants and joint fillers as indicated.

D. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, sealants, and insulation, as the Work progresses.



Project No. 4587


E. Corrosion Protection: Apply bituminous paint or other permanent separation materials on concealed surfaces where metals would otherwise be in direct contact with substrate materials that are incompatible or could result in corrosion or deterioration of either material or finish.

F. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.




Project No. 4587

DECORATIVE FORMED METAL 057500 - 1

SECTION 057500 - DECORATIVE FORMED METAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal base.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for decorative formed metal items. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate installation of decorative formed metal with adjacent construction to ensure that wall assemblies, flashings, trim, and joint sealants, are protected against damage from the effects of weather, age, corrosion, and other causes of deterioration.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including finishing materials.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6-inch-square Samples of metal of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator .


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing decorative formed metal similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.



Project No. 4587


1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver decorative formed metal products wrapped in protective coverings and strapped together in suitable packs or in heavy-duty cartons. Remove protective coverings before they stain or bond to finished surfaces.

B. Store products on elevated platforms in a dry location.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, beams, and other construction contiguous with decorative formed metal by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL

A. General: Fabricate products from sheet metal without pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.


A. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive recommended by metal fabricator that will fully bond metal to metal, will prevent telegraphing and oil-canning, and is compatible with substrate and noncombustible after curing.1. Contact Adhesive: VOC content of not more than 80 g/L when calculated according to 40

CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).2. Metal-to-Metal Adhesive: VOC content of not more than 30 g/L when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).3. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: VOC content of not more than 70 g/L when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).4. Special-Purpose Contact Adhesive: (Contact adhesive used to bond melamine-covered

board, metal, unsupported vinyl, ultrahigh molecular weight polyethylene, and rubber or wood veneer, 1/16 inch thick or less, to any surface): 250 g/L.


A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble decorative formed metal items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.



Project No. 4587


B. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of decorative formed metal items with those of adjoining construction to produce integrated assemblies with closely fitting joints and with edges and surfaces aligned unless otherwise indicated.

C. Form metal to profiles indicated, in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Produce flat, flush surfaces without cracking or grain separation at bends. Fold back exposed edges of unsupported sheet metal to form a 1/2-inch-wide hem on the concealed side, or ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inchand support with concealed stiffeners.

D. Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing materials, or both, as needed to provide surface flatness equivalent to stretcher-leveled standard of flatness and sufficient strength for indicated use.

1. Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of adjoining sheets in flush alignment.

E. Build in straps, plates, and brackets as needed to support and anchor fabricated items to adjoining construction. Reinforce decorative formed metal items as needed to attach and support other construction.

F. Provide support framing, mounting and attachment clips, splice sleeves, fasteners, and accessories needed to install decorative formed metal items.

G. Where welding or brazing is indicated, weld or braze joints and seams continuously. Grind, fill, and dress to produce smooth, flush, exposed surfaces in which joints are not visible after finishing is completed.

1. Use welding and brazing procedures that will blend with and not cause discoloration of metal being joined.

2.4 METAL BASE (SSB-1)

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Elite Xpressions, LLC

B. Form metal base from metal of type and thickness indicated below:

1. Stainless-Steel Sheet: 0.030 inch.2. Finish: No. 4.3. Profile: Straight4. Height: As indicated on the Drawings.5. Lengths: Manufacturer's longest standard length to minimize seams.6. Outside Corners: Preformed.7. Inside Corners: Preformed.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1587&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd&mf=&src=wd



Project No. 4587


2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.6 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.

1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.

C. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

D. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of decorative formed metal.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 METAL BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing metal base.

B. Apply metal base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Attach metal base to substrate using a construction adhesive recommended by manufacturer. Do not use self-adhering wall base system.

D. Install metal base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

E. Tightly adhere metal base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.



Project No. 4587


F. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

G. Job-Formed Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns

not less than 12 inches (76 mm) in length. (76 mm)


A. Unless otherwise indicated, clean metals by washing thoroughly with water and soap, rinsing with clean water, and drying with soft cloths.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of decorative formed metal items from damage during construction period. Remove temporary protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.




Project No. 4587

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 1

SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.2. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.3. Plywood backing panels.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.


A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Preservative-treated wood.2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.3. Power-driven fasteners.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground.



Project No. 4587


1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

2. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

C. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

D. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:1. Blocking.2. Nailers.3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.4. Cants.



Project No. 4587


2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exterior, A-C , fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fastenersof Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.


A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

E. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

F. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:



Project No. 4587


1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),

"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.

3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.




Project No. 4587

CUSTOM MILLWORK 062210 - 1

SECTION 062210 – CUSTOM MILLWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes Custom Millwork:

1. Reception Desk 6C012. Nurse Station 6C183. Nurse Station 6C27.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 05 Section "Decorative Formed Metal" for metal wall base incorporated into millwork.

2. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Product Data: For panel products, high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, solid-surfacing material, and finishing materials and processes.

C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Shop Drawings, indicating fabrication and installation methods, to include plans and elevations at not less than ½” = 1’ – 0” (1:20) scale and details at not less than 3” = 1’ -0” (1:5) scale. Indicate required accessory items, field dimensions, materials and finishes. Indicate compliance with specification requirements.

2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.

3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for all items installed in the millwork.4. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification

numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf.



Project No. 4587


D. Samples for Verification:

1. For each type of product indicated.2. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.3. Solid-surfacing materials, 6 inches square.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.

C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

C. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interiorcustom woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers and wood doors with face veneers that are sequence matched with woodwork.

D. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior custom woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels and certificates indicating that millwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.

2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with such selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Do not deliver millwork until painting and similar operations that could damage the millwork have been completed in installation areas. If millwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.



Project No. 4587


1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior custom woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. All woodwork materials shall be new and shall conform to the Premium Grade requirements of the AWI Quality Standards, latest edition.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

1. Use treated materials that comply with requirements of referenced woodworking standard. Do not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.

2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials.

3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation.



Project No. 4587


C. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard panels complying with ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84.

D. PLASTIC-LAMINATE MILLWORK

1. Grade: Premium.2. Laminate Cladding for Exposed and Semiexposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative

laminate complying with the following requirements:

a. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS.b. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.c. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.d. Retain one edge construction from subparagraph below. Coordinate with

standards and grade selection.e. Edges: Grade HGS.

3. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

a. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations on the drawings.

E. SOLID SURFACE MATERIALS

1. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS-1.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as indicated on drawings.

b. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations shown on drawings.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.

D. Adhesives, General: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde.



Project No. 4587


E. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives: Installation adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.2. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.3. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.


A. Interior Millwork and trim: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard and according to the sizes and designs indicated on the drawings and specifications, and assembled in single and complete units insofar as the dimensions thereof will permit shipment to and installation at the building. Large pieces requiring sectional construction shall have their several parts accurately fitted and aligned with each other and be provided with ample screws, glue and bolt blocks, tongues, grooves and splines, dowels, mortises and tenons, screws, bolts, or suitable means of concealed fastening, as required to render the work substantial, rigid and permanently secured in proper position to related section.

B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.

C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.

D. Fabricate Millwork and trim to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated.

E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete.

2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.

F. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.



Project No. 4587


2.4 FASTENERS

A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Stainless-Steel Items: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.2. Dissimilar Metals: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.

B. Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Unless otherwise indicated, select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring indicated items to other types of construction indicated.

C. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting components and for attaching decorative metal items to other work unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193 or ICC-ES AC308.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL SURFACES

A. Fabricate millwork surfaces according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. Grade: Premium.

B. Configuration:

1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top.

C. Countertops: 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material.

D. Horizontal Surfaces: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material.

E. Fabricate countertops with shop-applied edges unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

F. Joints: Fabricate without joints whenever possible.



Project No. 4587


G. Joints: Fabricate in sections for joining in field.

1. Joint Locations: As designated on approved shop drawing. Not within 18 inches of a sink or cooktop and not where a countertop section less than 36 inches long would result, unless unavoidable.

2. Splined Joints: Accurately cut kerfs in edges at joints for insertion of metal splines to maintain alignment of surfaces at joints. Make width of cuts slightly more than thickness of splines to provide snug fit. Provide at least three splines in each joint.

2.6 SHOP PRIMING

A. Interior Wood Trim for Transparent Finish: Shop seal with stain (if required), other required pretreatments, and first coat of finish as specified in Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing."

B. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing wood trim, as applicable to each unit of work.

1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of wood trim. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces.

2.7 SHOP FINISHING

A. General: Finish wood trim at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing wood trim, as applicable to each unit of work.

1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of wood trim. Apply two coats to end-grain surfaces.

C. Transparent Finish for Interior Trim:

1. Grade: Premium.2. Finish: System - 2, precatalyzed lacquer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition millwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.



Project No. 4587


B. Before installing millwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install millwork and woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.

B. All millwork shall be fabricated as detailed in the drawings

C. Assemble millwork and woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.

D. Install all Millwork and trim straight, plumb, level and in true alignment except where otherwise indicated. Fit all joints closely and fasten all pieces rigidly in place. Nails shall be finish or casing nails. Countersink nail heads and leave ready for putty. Joints shall be neatly matched and mitered. Fill exposed joints prior to jointing.

1. Finished size shall be as indicated on the drawings.2. Surfaces shall be left free from hammer marks, free from warp, twist, open joints or other

defects and shall be cleaned, scraped and sanded ready for finishing.3. Lengths of all running trim shall be as long as practical.4. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a

tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

E. Scribe and cut Millwork to fit adjoining work refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

G. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 96 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.

1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished.

2. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing.3. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch

in 96 inches.4. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with

manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

5. Install countertop with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

6. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."



Project No. 4587


H. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.


A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.




Project No. 4587

PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

064116 - 1

SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced

architectural cabinets that are not concealed within other construction.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: For plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.2. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.


A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program.

B. Research reports.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

1. Shop Certification: AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant.

B. Installer Qualifications: AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant.



Project No. 4587


064116 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ARCHITECTURAL CABINET FABRICATORS

A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, available fabricators offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Flakeboard Company Limited2. Panel Source International, Inc.3. Roseburg Forest Products4. SierraPine5. Temple-Inland Inc

2.2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1. Provide inspections of fabrication and installation together with labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified.

B. Grade: Premium.

C. Type of Construction: Frameless.

D. Door and Drawer-Front Style: Flush overlay.

E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by quality standard.

F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:

1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.4. Edges: Grade HGS.5. Pattern Direction: As indicated.

G. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.

H. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body.

1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued dovetail joints.

I. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:



Project No. 4587


064116 - 3

1. As indicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.

2. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations.

2.3 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.

B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.3. Straw-Based Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, except for density.4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay.5. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or MDF finished with thermally fused,

melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for Test Methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.

2.4 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General: Use materials that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as determined by testing performed on identical products by a qualified testing agency.

1. Use treated materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard. Do not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.

2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials.

3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation.



Project No. 4587


064116 - 4

2.5 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening, self-closing.

C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter.

D. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal, two-pin type with shelf hold-down clip.

E. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.

1. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted and extending under bottom edge of drawer.

a. Type: Full extension.b. Material: Zinc-plated steel with polymer rollers.

2. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-overtravel-extension type; zinc-plated-steel ball-bearing slides.

3. For drawers not more than 3 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1.

4. For drawers more than 3 inches high, but not more than 6 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-100.

5. For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-200.

6. For computer keyboard shelves, provide Grade 1HD-100.7. For trash bins not more than 20 inches high and 16 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-

200.

F. Lateral File Hanging Rails: Double and single steel hanging rails as required for hanging letter size file folders.

G. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

I. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.

J. Grommets for Cable Passage: 2-inch OD, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range..

K. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.



Project No. 4587


064116 - 5

L. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.

C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Resorcinol.

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

B. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours.

B. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with quality standard grade of item to be installed.

C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with wafer-head cabinet installation screws.

D. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches using concealed shims.

1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.



Project No. 4587


064116 - 6

2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips or No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.




Project No. 4587

RESIN PANELS 066500 - 1

SECTION 066500 – RESIN PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Resin Panels are fabricated, laminated and finished in the size and configuration required for each installation. Panels are installed in various frame systems and mounting systems.

1. Resin Panels2. Factory Laminated Resin Panels3. Panel Mounting System

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 06 “Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry2. Division 06 "Cusom Millwork"3. Division 09 “Gypsum Board Systems”

1.2 REFERENCES

A. AWI Quality Standards (Architectural Woodwork Institute)

B. ASTM E-84 (Method of test for surface burning characteristics of building materials)

C. BHMA (Builder's Hardware Manufacturers Associations)

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. All products are to be packaged at the factory in heavy cardboard cartons.

B. All shipments to the job site shall be made on wooden pallets.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

C. Samples for verification: In manufacturer’s standard size but not less tan 6”x6” sections of each different color and pattern required.

D. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer



Project No. 4587


F. Material Certificates: For each product signed by manufacturer.

G. Source quality-control test reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this project who are competent in the techniques required and certified by the manufacturer.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

B. Environmental Limitations: do not install Solid Polymer Fabrications until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, and ambient temperatures and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Doors and Borrowed-light Panels: Full-size units equal to 2 percent of the largest panel installed, but no fewer than 3 units.

2. Divider Panels: Three additional full-size units.”

1.8 WARRANTY

A. All products shall be warranted to be free from defects for one year after substantial completion.



Project No. 4587


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESIN PANELS (DRP-#)

A. Manufacturer: 3FORM INC

1. Products: As indicated on drawing

a. Material: Polyester based interlayer materialb. Color and Pattern: as indicated on drawingsc. Panel Size: as indicated on drawingsd. Panel Thickness: as indicated on drawingse. Panel Finish: as indicated on drawingsf. Density: ASTM D 1505: 1.27 kg/m3g. Flame Spread: ASTM E84-04: 15 Class A: 26-75, ASTM D 635: self extinguishingh. NFPA: Class A, wall, stand-off configuration only

2. Products: Custom, factory fabricated laminate panels:

a. Material, color and pattern, panel thickness, panel finish as indicated on the finish schedule.

2.2 HARDWARE

A. Manufacturer: 3FORM INC, Salt Lake City, Utah 800-726-0126

1. Product: Framed fixed partition system 200.14.

a. Material: Aluminumb. Finish: Satin Anodizedc. Installation: Specified panels, as indicated on the finish schedule; framing system.

Refer to drawings for locations.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Comply with manufacturers written recommendations and requirements.

B. All Surface Systems panels, hardware and accessories shall be factory finished and ready to install. Field fabrication will be required at perimeter conditions.

C. Panel edges must be refinished per manufacturer’s instruction after field cutting, before installation.

1. Field cut resin panels to have flame polished finished edge prior to installation.



Project No. 4587


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Site verifications and conditions – verify substrate conditions are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Open cartons and carefully inspect all panels.

C. Arrange panels on each wall to achieve the best combination of color, texture and grain, before installing.

D. Factory Laminating: Laminate front and back finish resin panels with one or two sandwiched patterned layers, as indicated per specified panels listed on the finish schedule, and where indicated on the drawings.

1. Use adhesives and techniques recommended by manufacturer.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Structural walls should be finished, with building completely closed. Walls shall be thoroughly dry before starting installation

B. Protect existing surfaces with drop cloths.

3.3 CONDITIONING

A. All panels shall be allowed to equalize to the moisture and temperature in the room environment prior to installation. To ensure product performance, a temperature range of 60°-80°F and a humidity range of 35-55% must be maintained during storage, installation and product life cycle.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install all fasteners, adhesives and bonding agents in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

B. Install all materials plumb, level and scribed to adjacent finishes in accordance with approved shop drawings and product data.

C. Avoid contamination of the panel faces with adhesives, solvents or cleaners during installation.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect surfaces from damage until date of substantial completion. Repair or replace damaged materials or surfaces.



Project No. 4587


B. Clean panels, trim and hardware according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.




Project No. 4587

ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 1

SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Roof curbs.


A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ROOF CURBS

A. Roof Curbs: Internally reinforced roof-curb units capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings, bearing continuously on roof structure, and capable of meeting performance requirements; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, straight sides, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.

B. Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.

C. Material: Stainless-steel sheet, 0.078 inch thick.

1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.

D. Construction:

1. Curb Profile: Manufacturer's standard compatible with roofing system.2. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom to

conform to roof profile.3. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing surface unless otherwise

indicated.4. Top Surface: Level top of curb, with roof slope accommodated by sloping deck-mounting

flange or by use of leveler frame.5. Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch- thick glass-fiber board insulation.6. Liner: Same material as curb, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish.7. Nailer: Factory-installed wood nailer under top flange on side of curb, continuous around

curb perimeter.



Project No. 4587

ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 2

8. Wind Restraint Straps and Base Flange Attachment: Provide wind restraint straps, welded strap connectors, and base flange attachment to roof structure at perimeter of curb, of size and spacing required to meet wind uplift requirements.

9. Platform Cap: Where portion of roof curb is not covered by equipment, provide weathertight platform cap formed from 3/4-inch thick plywood covered with metal sheet of same type, thickness, and finish as required for curb.

10. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard, removable, fabricated of same metal and finish as curb.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install roof accessories level; plumb; true to line and elevation; and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads.

3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.

4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or loosening of fasteners and seals.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of stainless-steel roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of underlayment and cover with manufacturer's recommended slip sheet.

C. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.

3.2 REPAIR AND CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.




Project No. 4587

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1

SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.2. Penetrations in smoke barriers.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 078443 "Joint Firestopping" for joints in or between fire-resistance-rated construction, at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections, and in smoke barriers.

1.3 UNIT PRICES

A. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices.





B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping system, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction prior to submittal.



Project No. 4587



A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping systems.



Project No. 4587


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products subject to compliance with through penetration firestop systems (XHEZ) listed in Volume II of the UL Fire Resistance Directory as indicated in the schedule by Hilti, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following:

1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.2. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency.1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

2.3 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=5054&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd



Project No. 4587


3. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping systems showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479.

D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-inch wg.1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at and no more than 50-

cfm cumulative total for any 100 sq. ft. at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

F. VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following limits for VOC content:

1. Sealants: 250 g/L.2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

G. Low-Emitting Materials: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

H. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for conditions indicated.

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials.2. Substrate primers.3. Collars.4. Steel sleeves.

2.4 FILL MATERIALS

A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.

B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture.

C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced intumescent elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.

E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents or inorganic fibers.



Project No. 4587


F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.

G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed.

I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants.

2.5 MIXING

A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign

materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials.2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces

capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.



Project No. 4587


B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings.1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming

materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of firestopping.

C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less than 3 inches high and with minimum 0.375-inch strokes.

1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet from end of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet.

B. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of penetration firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping systems. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.4. Date of installation.5. Manufacturer's name.6. Installer's name.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL



Project No. 4587


A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to ASTM E 2174.

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping system is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping system to comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.


A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.

B. Firestopping with No Penetrating Items:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-0055 C-AJ-0090 F-A-0005 F-A-0012 F-A-0014 W-L-0014.2. W-Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing.3. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.

C. Firestopping for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-1149 C-AJ-1291 C-AJ-1226 F-A-1016 F-A-1017W-L-1054

W-L-1206 W-L-1297 C-BJ-1046.

2. W-Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing.3. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.

D. Firestopping for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing:

1. UL-Classified Systems: F-A-2053 F-A-2054 F-A-2066 F-A-2103 W-L-2128C-AJ-2567.2. W-Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing.3. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.

E. Firestopping for Electrical Cables:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-3180 C-AJ-3095 W-J-3060 F-C-3012 F-C-3044 W-L-3161.



Project No. 4587



F. Firestopping for Cable Trays with Electric Cables:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-4034 C-AJ-4071 W-J-4048 W-J-4050 W-L-4011 W-L-4038 W-L-4050.


G. Firestopping for Insulated Pipes:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-5048 C-AJ-5091 F-A-5017 W-J-5042 W-L-5029 W-L-5257

W-L-5244.


H. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-6006 C-AJ-6017 W-L-6019.2. W-Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing.3. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.

I. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-7051 C-AJ-7084 W-L-7155 W-L-7042.


J. Firestopping for Groupings of Penetrants:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-8099 C-AJ-8143 F-A-1022 F-A-1023 F-A-1066 F-A-8016

W-L-8065 W-L-8071.





Project No. 4587

JOINT FIRESTOPPING 078443 - 1

SECTION 078443 - JOINT FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions.2. Joints in smoke barriers.


1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers and for wall identification.

2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for firestop tracks for metal-framed partition heads.





B. Product Schedule: For each joint firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing agency.

1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's illustration for a particular joint firestopping system condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by joint firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.





Project No. 4587


B. Product Test Reports: For each joint firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that joint firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with UL's "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install joint firestopping systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by joint firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure joint firestopping systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that joint firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design.

B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate joint firestopping systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products subject to compliance with joint firestopping systems (XHBN) listed in Volume II of the UL Fire Resistance Directory as indicated in the schedule by Hilti, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following:

1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.2. Grace Construction Products.3. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.





Project No. 4587


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Perform joint firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Joint Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Joint firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency.

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

2.3 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Joint Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which joint firestopping systems are installed. Joint firestopping systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.

B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide joint firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079.

1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the wall, floor, or roof in or between which it is installed.

C. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per UL 2079 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-inch wg.

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft. of joint at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

D. Exposed Joint Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

E. Joints at Intersection between Rated Wall Assemblies and Nonrated Horizontal Assemblies: Provide fire-resistive joint system with ratings determined by ASTM E2837.

F. VOC Content: Fire-resistive joint system sealants shall comply with the following limits for VOC content:

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

G. Mold Resistance: Provide fire-resistive joint system sealant with mold and mildew resistance rating of 0 as determined by ASTM G21.

H. Low-Emitting Materials: Fire-resistive joint system sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."



Project No. 4587


I. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install elastomeric fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by joint firestopping system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing fire-resistive joint systems, clean joints immediately to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of elastomeric fill materials or compromise fire-resistive rating.

2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with elastomeric fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.


B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by joint firestopping system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support elastomeric fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing elastomeric fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-resistive joint system.

C. Install elastomeric fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:



Project No. 4587


1. Elastomeric fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply elastomeric fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints.3. For elastomeric fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to

produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Joint Identification: Identify joint firestopping systems with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of joint edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove or joint firestopping system. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Joint Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.3. Designation of applicable testing agency.4. Date of installation.5. Manufacturer's name.6. Installer's name.


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to ASTM E 2393.

B. Where deficiencies are found or joint firestopping systems are damaged or removed due to testing, repair or replace joint firestopping systems so they comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing joint firestopping systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.


A. Clean off excess elastomeric fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by joint firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure joint firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.

3.7 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE



Project No. 4587


A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHBN or Category XHDG.

B. Wall-to-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems:

1. UL-Classified Systems: WW-D-0017 WW-D-0032 WW-D-0040 WW-D-0067WW-D-1047 WW-D-1080.

2. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated.3. Movement Capabilities: Class I - 50 percent compression or extension.

C. Head-of-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems:

1. UL-Classified Systems: HW-D-0042 HW-D-0045 HW-D-1067 HW-D-0209 HW-D-0081 HW-D-0268.

2. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated.3. Movement Capabilities: Class I - 50 percent compression or extension.

D. Bottom-of-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems:

1. UL-Classified Systems: BW-S-0001 BW-S-0002 BW-S-0023.2. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated.3. Movement Capabilities: Class I - 25 percent compression or extension.




Project No. 4587

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Mildew-resistant joint sealants.2. Latex joint sealants.


1. Section 079219 "Acoustical Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in sound-rated construction.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.3. Joint-sealant formulation.4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Manufacturer's Compatibility and Adhesion Testing data report.



Project No. 4587


D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: manufacturer’s data based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for adhesion to, staining of, and compatibility with joint substrates and other materials matching those in project.

B. Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

2. When joint substrates are wet.3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated.4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications.3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.



Project No. 4587


4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following:

1. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.

2. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of 775 g/L or less.

C. Low-Emitting Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

D. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS

A. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.

2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin)Type O (open-cell material) Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.



Project No. 4587


C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete.




Project No. 4587


4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal.b. Glass.c. Porcelain enamel.d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application,

and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.



Project No. 4587


1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows.

b. Joints between interior wall surfaces and countertops where sinks are not located. c. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex.d. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of

colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.b. Joints between countertops and walls where sinks are located.c. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT. d. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of

colors.




Project No. 4587

ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 079219 - 1

SECTION 079219 - ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical joint sealants.


1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric, latex, and butyl-rubber-based joint sealants for nonacoustical applications.


A. Product Data: For each acoustical joint sealant.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of acoustical joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

D. Acoustical-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.3. Joint-sealant formulation.4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Product Test Reports: For each kind of acoustical joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

1.5 WARRANTY



Project No. 4587


A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace acoustical joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Provide acoustical joint-sealant products that effectively reduce airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction, as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following:

1. Acoustical sealants and sealant primers shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.

C. ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

D. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex acoustical sealant complying with ASTM C 834.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:a. GE Construction Sealants; RCS20 Acoustical.b. Henkel Corporation; OSI Pro-Series SC-175 Acoustical Sound Sealant.c. Tremco, Incorporated; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.d. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.e. Colors of Exposed Acoustical Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range of colors.

E. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber acoustical sealant.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Pecora Corporation; BA-98.b. Serious Energy Inc.; Quiet Seal 350.


A. Primer: Material recommended by acoustical-joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456934036&mf=&src=wd









Project No. 4587


C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive acoustical joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing acoustical joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by acoustical-joint-sealant manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Comply with acoustical joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical joint sealant. Install acoustical joint sealants at both faces of partitions, at perimeters, and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919, ASTM C 1193, and manufacturer's written recommendations for closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions to underside of floor slabs above acoustical ceilings.

C. Acoustical Ceiling Areas: Apply acoustical joint sealant at perimeter edge moldings of acoustical ceiling areas in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

3.4 CLEANING



Project No. 4587


A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of acoustical joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect acoustical joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated acoustical joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.




Project No. 4587

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Interior standard steel doors and frames.


1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate requirements for installation of door hardware, electrified door hardware, and access control and security systems.





1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.



Project No. 4587


B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type.2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses.3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.5. Details of each different wall opening condition.6. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control

systems, and security systems.7. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.8. Details of accessories.9. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.

C. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal doors and frames, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final door hardware schedule.


A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

B. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire-rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies.


A. Deliver hollow-metal doors and frames palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal doors and frames vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.



Project No. 4587


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide assemblies with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

2. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.

B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Lite Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.

2.2 INTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2; SDI A250.4, Level B. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

1. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.c. Face: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch.d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.e. Edge Bevel: Provide manufacturer's standard beveled or square edges.f. Core: Manufacturer's standard .g. Fire-Rated Core: Manufacturer's standard vertical steel stiffener core for fire-rated

doors.

2. Frames:

a. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.b. Construction: Full profile welded.

3. Exposed Finish: Prime.



Project No. 4587


2.3 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame standard, and suitable for performance level indicated.

2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for frames with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches of frame height above 7 feet.

B. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor.

C. Floor Anchors for Concrete Slabs with Underlayment: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at top of underlayment.

D. Material: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

D. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.

E. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

F. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

G. Glazing for fire-rated doors: Comply with requirements in Section 088813 "Fire-Resistant Glazing."



Project No. 4587


2.5 FABRICATION

A. Door Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as frames.

1. Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by welding.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal doors and frames to receive templated mortised hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal doors and frames for hardware.

D. Glazed Lites: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints.

1. Provide stops and moldings flush with face of door, and with beveled stops unless otherwise indicated.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal doors and frames.

4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated.

5. Provide stops for installation with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.



Project No. 4587


2.6 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are removed.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow-metal doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with approved Shop Drawings and with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Comply with SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without damage to completed Work.

a. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch-up finishes.

b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.

2. Fire-Rated Openings: Install frames according to NFPA 80.3. Floor Anchors: Secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

4. Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.



Project No. 4587


b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit and adjust hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: Comply with SDI A250.8.2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing", Section 088813 "Fire-Resistant Glazing" and with hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP

A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections.




Project No. 4587

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.2. Factory finishing flush wood doors.3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.


1. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.2. Section 088813 "Fire-Resistant Glazing" for glass view panels in fire-rated flush wood

doors.


A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

1. Dimensions and locations of blocking.2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts.4. Undercuts.5. Requirements for veneer matching.6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.

C. Samples: For factory-finished doors.


A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.



Project No. 4587


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Eggers Industries.2. Graham Wood Doors; an Assa Abloy Group company.3. Mohawk Doors; a Masonite company.

2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."

B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty

C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated.

2. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

3. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

D. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control, based on testing according to UL 1784.

E. Particleboard-Core Doors:

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, , made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde.2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate

through-bolting hardware.3. Provide doors with glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores instead of

particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.

F. Mineral-Core Doors:

1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.

2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.







Project No. 4587


3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

a. Screw-Holding Capacity: 500 lbf per WDMA T.M.-10.

2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors :

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces.2. Species: White oak.3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced).4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Runningmatch.6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening.7. Core: Particleboard.8. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive

planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.

2.4 LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS

A. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood-veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with

applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."3. Glazing: Factory install fire-resistant glazing in fire-rated doors indicated to be factory

finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 088813 "Fire-Resistant Glazing."



Project No. 4587


2.6 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium.2. Finish: WDMA TR-4 conversion varnish.3. Staining: Color to match plastic laminate (PL-1) as indicated in the Finish Schedule on

the Drawings.4. Effect: Filled finish.5. Sheen: Satin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80.2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8

inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.




Project No. 4587

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 1

SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.



1. Include construction details, fire ratings, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Samples: For each type of access door and frame and for each finish specified, complete assembly minimum 6 by 6 inches in size.

C. Product Schedule: For access doors and frames.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.

2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges :

1. Description: Face of door flush with frame; with concealed flange for gypsum board installation and concealed hinge.

2. Locations: Wall.3. Door Size: As required for access and approved by Architect.4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch, 16 gage, factory primed.5. Frame Material: Same material and thickness as door.6. Latch and Lock: Cam latch, screwdriver operated.



Project No. 4587


B. Recessed Access Doors with Concealed Flanges:1. Description: Door face recessed 1/2 inch for gypsum board infill; with concealed flange

for gypsum board installation and concealed hinge.2. Locations: Ceiling.3. Door Size: As required for access and approved by Architect.4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch, 16 gage, factory finished.5. Latch and Lock: Cam latch, screwdriver operated.

2.3 FIRE-RATED ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges :

1. Description: Door face flush with frame, uninsulated; with concealed flange for gypsum board installation, self-closing door, and concealed hinge.

2. Locations: Wall and ceiling.3. Door Size: As required for access and approved by Architect.4. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.5. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.036 inch, 20 gage, factory primed.6. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door.7. Latch and Lock: Self-closing, self-latching door hardware, operated by key.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.

C. Frame Anchors: Same material as door face.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish mounting holes, attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated.

1. For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum panels securely attached to perimeter of frames.



Project No. 4587


2. For concealed flanges with plaster bead for full-bed plaster applications, provide zinc-coated expanded-metal lath and exposed casing bead welded to perimeter of frames.

D. Latch and Lock Hardware:

1. Quantity: Furnish number of latches and locks required to hold doors tightly closed.2. Keys: Furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Painted Finishes: Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

1. Factory Primed: Apply manufacturer's standard, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.




Project No. 4587

DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1

SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. Section Includes: Finish Hardware for door openings, except as otherwise specified herein.

1. Door hardware for steel (hollow metal) doors.2. Door hardware for aluminum doors.3. Door hardware for wood doors.4. Door hardware for other doors indicated.5. Keyed cylinders as indicated.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 6: Rough Carpentry.2. Division 8: Aluminum Doors and Frames3. Division 8: Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.4. Division 8: Wood Doors.5. Division 26 Electrical6. Division 28: Electronic Security

C. References: Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specific requirements, the most restrictive shall govern.

1. Builders Hardware Manufacturing Association (BHMA)2. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code3. NFPA 80 -Fire Doors and Windows4. ANSI-A156.xx- Various Performance Standards for Finish Hardware5. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Test of Door Assemblies6. ANSI-A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities7. DHI /ANSI A115.IG – Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware8. NYCBC – New York City Building Code

D. Intent of Hardware Groups

1. Should items of hardware not definitely specified be required for completion of the Work, furnish such items of type and quality comparable to adjacent hardware and appropriate for service required.

2. Where items of hardware aren’t definitely or correctly specified, are required for completion of the Work, a written statement of such omission, error, or other discrepancy to Architect, prior to date specified for receipt of bids for clarification by addendum; or, furnish such items in the type and quality established by this specification, and appropriate to the service intended.



Project No. 4587


1.2 SUBSTITUTIONS:

A. Comply with Division 1.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:


B. Special Submittal Requirements: Combine submittals of this Section with Sections listed below to ensure the "design intent" of the system/assembly is understood and can be reviewed together.

C. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including the following:

1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication.2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.3. Wiring diagrams for each electric product specified. Coordinate voltage with electrical

before submitting.4. Submit 6 copies of catalog cuts with hardware schedule. 5. Provide 9001-Quality Management and 14001-Environmental Management for products

listed in Materials Section 2.2

D. Shop Drawings - Hardware Schedule: Submit 6 complete reproducible copy of detailed hardware schedule in a vertical format.

1. List groups and suffixes in proper sequence.2. Completely describe door and list architectural door number.3. Manufacturer, product name, and catalog number.4. Function, type, and style.5. Size and finish of each item.6. Mounting heights.7. Explanation of abbreviations and symbols used within schedule.8. Detailed wiring diagrams, specially developed for each opening, indicating all electric

hardware, security equipment and access control equipment, and door and frame rough-ins required for specific opening.

E. Templates: Submit templates and "reviewed Hardware Schedule" to door and frame supplier and others as applicable to enable proper and accurate sizing and locations of cutouts and reinforcing.

1. Templates, wiring diagrams and "reviewed Hardware Schedule" of electrical terms to electrical for coordination and verification of voltages and locations.

F. Samples: (If requested by the Architect)

1. 1 sample of Lever and Rose/Escutcheon design, (pair).2. 3 samples of metal finishes



Project No. 4587


G. Contract Closeout Submittals: Comply with Division 1 including specific requirements indicated.

1. Operating and maintenance manuals: Submit 3 sets containing the following.

a. Complete information in care, maintenance, and adjustment, and data on repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes.

b. Catalog pages for each product.c. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer.d. Parts list for each product.

2. Copy of final hardware schedule, edited to reflect, "As installed".3. Copy of final keying schedule4. As installed “Wiring Diagrams” for each piece of hardware connected to power, both low

voltage and 110 volts.5. One set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including

changing of cylinders.



1. Statement of qualification for distributor and installers.2. Statement of compliance with regulatory requirements and single source responsibility.3. Distributor's Qualifications: Firm with 3 years experience in the distribution of commercial

hardware.

a. Distributor to employ full time Architectural Hardware Consultants (AHC) for the purpose of scheduling and coordinating hardware and establishing keying schedule.

b. Hardware Schedule shall be prepared and signed by an AHC.

4. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with 3 years experienced in installation of similar hardware to that required for this Project, including specific requirements indicated.

5. Regulatory Label Requirements: Provide testing agency label or stamp on hardware for labeled openings.

a. Provide UL listed hardware for labeled and 20 minute openings in conformance with requirements for class of opening scheduled.

b. Underwriters Laboratories requirements have precedence over this specification where conflict exists.

6. Single Source Responsibility: Except where specified in hardware schedule, furnish products of only one manufacturer for each type of hardware.

B. Review Project for extent of finish hardware required to complete the Work. Where there is a conflict between these Specifications and the existing hardware, notify the Architect in writing and furnish hardware in compliance with the Specification unless otherwise directed in writing by the Architect.



Project No. 4587



A. Packing and Shipping: Comply with Division 1.

1. Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification.2. Package hardware to prevent damage during transit and storage.3. Mark hardware to correspond with "reviewed hardware schedule".4. Deliver hardware to door and frame manufacturer upon request.

B. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. Coordinate hardware with other work. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for the proper installation and function, regardless of omissions or conflicts in the information on the Contract Documents.

B. Review Shop Drawings for doors and entrances to confirm that adequate provisions will be made for the proper installation of hardware.

1.7 WARRANTY:

A. Refer to Conditions of the Contract

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty:

1. Closers: Thirty years2. Exit Devices: Five Years3. Locksets & Cylinders: Ten years4. All other Hardware: Two years.

1.8 OWNER’S INSTRUCTION:

A. Instruct Owner’s personnel in operation and maintenance of hardware units.

1.9 MAINTENANCE:

A. Extra Service Materials: Deliver to Owner extra materials from same production run as products installed. Package products with protective covering and identify with descriptive labels. Comply with Division 1 Closeout Submittals Section.

1. Special Tools: Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component.

2. Maintenance Tools: Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer.



Project No. 4587


3. Delivery, Storage and Protection: Comply with Owner’s requirements for delivery, storage and protection of extra service materials.

B. Maintenance Service: Submit for Owner’s consideration maintenance service agreement for electronic products installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. The following manufacturers are approved subject to compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents. Approval of manufacturers other than those listed shall be in accordance with Division 1.

Item: Manufacturer:Hinges StanleyLocksets SargentCylinders SargentExit Devices PrecisionClosers Stanley D-4551Overhead Stops ABHDoor Contacts By SecurityMagnetic Locks DynaLockPower Supply DynalockDoor Stops TrimcoFlush Bolts Trimco Coordinator & Brackets TrimcoThreshold & Gasketing Zero/National Guard

2.2 MATERIALS:

A. Hinges:

1. Template screw hole locations2. Minimum of 2 permanently lubricated non-detachable bearings3. Equip with easily seated, non-rising pins4. Provide hinges with non-removable pins (NRP) at out-swing locations5. All hinges to have hospital Tips6. Sufficient size to allow 180-degree swing of door7. Furnish hinges with five knuckles and concealed bearings8. Provide hinges of proper height and width for door size.9. Furnish 3 hinges per leaf to 7 foot 6 inch height. Add one for each additional 30 inches in

height or fraction thereof.10. Certified by BHMA for all applicable ANSI Standards for type, size, function and finish11. UL10C listed for Fire



Project No. 4587


B. Geared Continuous Hinges:

1. Certified by BHMA for ANSI A156.26 Grade 12. Anti-spinning through fastener3. UL10C listed for 3 hour Fire rating4. All hinges to have hospital tips5. Non-handed6. Lifetime warranty7. Provide Fire Pins for 3-hour fire ratings8. Sufficient size to permit door to swing 180 degrees

C. Cylindrical Type Locks and Latchsets:

1. Tested and approved by BHMA for ANSI A156.2, Series 4000, Operational Grade 1, Extra-Heavy Duty, and be UL10C listed.

2. Provide 9001-Quality Management and 14001-Environmental Management.3. Fit modified ANSI A115.2 door preparation.4. Locksets to have anti-rotational studs that are thru-bolted5. Each lever to have independent spring mechanism controlling it6. 2-3/4 inch backset7. 1/2 inch throw latchbolt8. Provide locksets with 6-pin removable and interchangeable core cylinders9. Core face must be the same finish as the lockset.10. Functions and design as indicated in the hardware groups.

D. Exit Devices shall:

1. Tested and approved by BHMA for ANSI 156.3, Grade 1 2. Provide 9001-Quality Management and 14001-Environmental Management.3. Furnish UL or recognized independent laboratory certified mechanical operational testing

to 9 million cycles minimum.4. Provide a deadlocking latchbolt5. Touchpad shall be “T” style6. Exposed components shall be of architectural metals and finishes.7. Lever design shall match lockset lever design8. Provide strikes as required by application.9. Fire exit devices to be listed for UL10C10. UL listed for Accident Hazard11. Shall consist of a cross bar or push pad, the actuating portion of which extends across,

shall not be less than one half the width of the door leaf.12. Provide vandal resistant or breakaway trim

E. Cylinders:

1. Provide the necessary cylinder housings, collars, rings & springs as recommended by the manufacturer for proper installation.

2. Provide the proper cylinder cams or tail piece as required to operate all locksets and other keyed hardware items listed in the hardware sets.

3. Coordinate and provide as required for related sections.



Project No. 4587


F. Door Closers shall:

1. Tested and approved by BHMA for ANSI 156.4, Grade 12. UL10C certified3. Provide 9001-Quality Management and 14001-Environmental Management. 4. Closer shall have extra-duty arms and knuckles5. Conform to ANSI 117.16. Maximum 2 7/16 inch case projection with non-ferrous cover7. Separate adjusting valves for closing and latching speed, and backcheck8. Provide adapter plates, shim spacers and blade stop spacers as required by frame and

door conditions9. Full rack and pinion type closer with 1½“ minimum bore10. Mount closers on non-public side of door and stair side of stairs, unless otherwise noted

in specification11. Closers shall be non-handed, non-sized and multi-sized.

G. Door Stops: Provide a dome floor or wall stop for every opening as listed in the hardware sets.

1. Wall stop and floor stop shall be wrought bronze, brass or stainless steel.2. Provide fastener suitable for wall construction.3. Coordinate reinforcement of walls where wall stop is specified. 4. Provide dome stops where wall stops are not practical. Provide spacers or carpet riser for

floor conditions encountered

H. Over Head Stops: Provide a Surface mounted or concealed overhead when a floor or wall stop cannot be used or when listed in the hardware set.

1. Concealed overhead stops shall be heavy duty bronze or stainless steel.2. Surface overhead stops shall be heavy duty bronze or stainless steel.

I. Push Plates: Provide with four beveled edges ANSI J301, .050 thickness, size as indicated in hardware set. Furnish oval-head countersunk screws to match finish.

J. Pulls with plates: Provide with four beveled edges ANSI J301, .050 thickness Plate s with ANSI J401 Pull as listed in hardware set. Provide proper fasteners for door construction.

K. Push Pull Bars: Provide ANSI J504, .1” Dia. Offset Pull and Push bar model and series as listed in hardware set. Provide proper fasteners for door construction.

L. Kick Plates: Provide with four beveled edges ANSI J102, 10 inches high by width less 2 inches on single doors and 1 inch on pairs of doors. Furnish oval-head countersunk screws to match finish.

M. Mop Plates: Provide with four beveled edges ANSI J103, 10 inches high by width less 1 inch on single doors and 1 inch on pairs of doors. Furnish oval-head countersunk screws to match finish.



Project No. 4587


N. Armor Plates: Provide ANSI J101 with four beveled edges, 32 inches high by width less 1 inch on single or pairs of doors. Furnish oval-head countersunk screws to match finish.

1. Provide cutouts for hardware as listed in the hardware sets.2. Provide Warnock Hersey labeled plates for 3 hour metal fire doors where allowed by local

authority.

O. Door Bolts: Flush bolts for wood or metal doors.

1. Provide a set of Automatic bolts, Certified ANSI/BHMA 156.3 Type 25 for hollow metal label doors.

2. Provide a set of Automatic bolts, Certified ANSI/BHMA 156.3 Type 27 at wood label doors.

3. Manual flush bolts, Certified ANSI/BHMA 156.16 at openings where allowed local authority.

4. Provide Dust Proof Strike, Certified ANSI/BHMA 156.16 at doors with flush bolts without thresholds.

P. Coordinator and Brackets: Provide a surface mounted coordinator when automatic bolts are used in the hardware set.

1. Coordinator, Certified ANSI/BHMA A1156.3 Type 21A for full width of the opening.2. Provide mounting brackets for soffit applied hardware.3. Provide hardware preparation (cutouts) for latches as necessary.

Q. Power Transfer: Power transfer device shall be of door and frame edge mount design. Manufactured to be concealed when door is closed. Steel housing with a flexible tube. Furnish with capability to accept wires in quantity indicated or as needed for electric hardware. Cutout size to be approximately 1.25 inches wide x 9 inches long. Back plates are made of 14 gage steel. Provide 4 screw mounting holes countersunk with flathead screws. Units shall allow 180 degree opening of doors. Units “UL Listed” as Miscellaneous Fire Door Accessory. Coordinate position in door and frame with other hardware applications.

R. Power Supply: UL Listed, Field Selectable 12VDC or 24VDC output. The power supply will specifically designed to support electric locks and access controls. The power supply uses 115 VAC at 800mA input. The power shall be able to be expanded to four station controls. The filtered and regulated output power is field selectable for 12 or 24 VDC.

1. Fire Alarm/Life Safety emergency release included in power supply.2. Available options for multiple door options four or more control stations, Adjustable Time

delay relay, Battery charging, Battery Backup.

S. Door Position Switch: Provide door position switch for door status monitoring as indicated in hardware sets.

1. At all fired rated doors the door and frames, position switch preparation will be provided by the door and frame manufacturer or by an authorized label service agent.

2. Armature shall be thru-bolted and can be provided with any projection required.3. Models will be available in US28, sprayed finishes and US32D. 4. Floor mounted shall be provided for a single door or double door hold open application.



Project No. 4587


5. Provide Armature extensions as required.

T. Seals: All seals shall be finished to match adjacent frame color. Seals shall be furnished as listed in schedule. Material shall be UL listed for labeled openings.

U. Weatherstripping: Provide at head and jambs only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable. Where bar-type weatherstrip is used with parallel arm mounted closers install weatherstrip first.

1. Weatherstrip shall be resilient seal of (Neoprene, Polyurethane, Vinyl, Pile, Nylon Brush, Silicone)

2. UL10C Positive Pressure rated seal set when required.

V. Door Bottoms/Sweeps: Surface mounted or concealed door bottom where listed in the hardware sets.

1. Door seal shall be resilient seal of (Neoprene, Polyurethane, Nylon Brush, Silicone) 2. UL10C Positive Pressure rated seal set when required.

W. Thresholds: Thresholds shall be aluminum beveled type with maximum height of ½” for conformance with ADA requirements. Furnish as specified and per details. Provide fasteners and screws suitable for floor conditions.

X. Provide one wall mounted Telkee, Lund or MMF series key cabinet complete with hooks, index and tags to accommodate 50% expansion. Coordinate mounting location with architect.

Y. Silencers: Furnish silencers on all interior frames, 3 for single doors, 2 for pairs. Omit where any type of seals occur.

2.3 FINISH:

A. Designations used in Schedule of Finish Hardware - 3.5, and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18 including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products

B. Powder coat door closers to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted.

C. Aluminum items shall be finished to match predominant adjacent material. Seals to coordinate with frame color.



Project No. 4587


2.4 KEYS AND KEYING:

A. Provide keyed brass construction cores and keys during the construction period. Construction control and operating keys and core shall not be part of the Owner's permanent keying system or furnished in the same keyway (or key section) as the Owner's permanent keying system. Permanent cores and keys (prepared according to the accepted keying schedule) will be furnished to the Owner.

B. Cylinders, removable small format interchangeable core system: Match Existing

C. Furnish keys in the following quantities:

1. 2 each Change keys each keyed core2. 15 each Construction masterkeys3. 1 each Control keys

D. The Owner, or the Owner's agent, will install permanent cores and return the construction cores to the Hardware Supplier.

E. Keying Schedule: Shall be provided by the [Insert local locksmith, facility locksmith, Factory.] Arrange for a keying meeting, with Architect, Owner and hardware supplier, and other involved parties to ensure locksets and locking hardware, are functionally correct and keying complies with project requirements. Furnish 3 typed copies of keying schedule to Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of conditions: Examine doors, frames, related items and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and or timely completion.

1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 HARDWARE LOCATIONS:

A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in the following publications except as specifically indicated or required to comply with the governing regulations.

1. Recommended Locations for Builder’s Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames, by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI).

2. Recommended locations for Architectural Hardware for flush wood doors (DHI).3. WDMA Industry Standard I.S.-1A-04, Industry Standard for Architectural wood flush

doors.



Project No. 4587


3.3 INSTALLATION:

A. Install each hardware item per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

B. Conform to local governing agency security ordinance.

C. Install Conforming to ICC/ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Usable Building and Facilities.

1. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that from the open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the landing side of the door.

D. Installed hardware using the manufacturers fasteners provided. Drill and tap all screw holes located in metallic materials. Do not use “Riv-Nuts” or similar products.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND FINAL ADJUSTMENT

A. Contractor/Installers, Field Services: After installation is complete, contractor shall inspect the completed door openings on site to verify installation of hardware is complete and properly adjusted, in accordance with both the Contract Documents and final shop drawings.

1. Check and adjust closers to ensure proper operation.2. Check latchset, lockset, and exit devices are properly installed and adjusted to ensure

proper operation.

a. Verify levers are free from binding.b. Ensure latchbolts and dead bolts are engaged into strike and hardware is

functioning.

3. Report findings, in writing, to architect indicating that all hardware is installed and functioning properly. Include recommendations outlining corrective actions for improperly functioning hardware if required.



Project No. 4587


3.5 SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE:

Manufacturer ListCode NameAB ABH Manufacturing Inc.ZE Zero InternationalSA SargentST StanleyLC LCNTR TrimcoDY DynaLockPR Precision

Finish List Code DescriptionAL Aluminum626 Satin Chromium PlatedSP28 Lacquer Sprayed AluminumUS26D Chromium Plated, DullUS32D Stainless Steel, DullBL Black P rime Coat

SET #1 – Office Function – No Closer – Doors 6C03, 6C04, 6C05, 6C06, 6C07, 6C12, 6C13, 6C14, 6C15, 6C17

Hinges FBB168 Per Section 2 US26D ST1 Office Function Lockset 10G05 LB 626 SA1 Permanent Core To Suit Keying Requirements 626 SA1 Stop 1211 or Surface Overhead Stop where required US32D TR3 Door Silencers 1229A (at Non-Fire Rated Openings) GREY TR

SET #2 – Privacy Function – No Closer – Doors 6C02

Hinges FBB168 Per Section 2 US26D ST1 Privacy Function Lockset 10U65 LB 626 SA1 Stop 1211 or Surface Overhead Stop where required US32D TR3 Door Silencers 1229A (at Non-Fire Rated Openings) GREY TR

SET #3 – Privacy Function – Rescue Hardware – Doors 6C22, 6C25

1 Pivot Set DAP-3 US26D ST1 Privacy Function Lockset 10U65 LB 626 SA1 Emergency Stop ES-1 626 ST1 Double Lip Strike DLS-/2 626 ST1 Stop 1211 or Surface Overhead Stop where required US32D TR1 Edge Seal/Gasketing 34AA AL ZE



Project No. 4587


SET #4 – Single Card Reader Lock Doors – Doors 6B-B, 6C19A, 6C19B, 6C21A, 6C21B, 6C23A, 6C23B, 6CR04, 6CR05, 6B1, 6C16A, 6C16B, 6C38

Hinges FBB168 Per Section 2 626 ST1 Storeroom Function Lock 10G04 LB 626 SA1 Permanent Core To Suit Keying Requirements 626 SA1 Closers D4551 x Proper Arm AL ST1 Stop 1211 or Surface Overhead Stop where required US32D TR3 Door Silencers 1229A (at Non-Fire Rated Openings) GREY TRSeal/Gasketing S188-BK (At Fire Rated Openings) BK ZE1 Electric Strike By Security Vendor1 Card Reader By Security Vendor1 Door Position Switch Sentrol 1078N – By Security Vendor1 Power Supply By Security Vendor1 Motion Sensor/Request to Exit GE-RCR-REX-W – By Security Vendor1 Set Wiring Diagrams By Security Vendor

NOTE: Coordinate wiring with related trades.NOTE: Overhead Stop – as required. Verify requirements.OPERATIONAL NOTE: Card Reader, tied to Security System, unlocks the Electric Strike allowing entry. Motion Sensor/Request to exit switch signals authorized exiting. Door position switch monitors door position open or closed. Free egress at all times.

SET #5 – Card Reader Exit Device – Door 6CR01, 6CR03, 6CR06

Hinges FBB168 Per Section 2 626 ST1 Lockable Function Exit Device (FL)2108 x 4908B 626 PR1 Rim Cylinder To suit1 Closers D4551 x Proper Arm AL ST1 Stop 1211 or Surface Overhead Stop where required US32D TR3 Door Silencers 1229A (at Non-Fire Rated Openings) GREY TRSeal/Gasketing S188-BK (At Fire Rated Openings) BK ZE1 Electric Strike By Security Vendor1 Card Reader By Security Vendor1 Door Position Switch Sentrol 1078N – By Security Vendor1 Power Supply By Security Vendor1 Motion Sensor/Request to Exit GE-RCR-REX-W – By Security Vendor1 Set Wiring Diagrams By Security Vendor

NOTE: Coordinate wiring with related trades.OPERATIONAL NOTE: Card Reader, tied to Security System, unlocks the Electric Strike allowing entry. Request to exit switch signals authorized exiting. Door position switch in Mag-Lock monitors door position. Free egress at all times.

SET #6 – Single at Janitor Closet – Doors 6C26

Hinges FBB168 Per Section 2 626 ST1 Storeroom Function Lock 10G04 LB 626 SA1 Overhead Stop 4400 Series US32D AB3 Door Silencers 1229A (at Non-Fire Rated Openings) GREY TR



Project No. 4587


SET #7 – Single Card Reader – Man Trap Doors 6C38A, 6C38B

Hinges FBB168 Per Section 2 626 ST1 Passage Function Latchset 10U15 LB 626 SA1 Closers D4551 x Proper Arm AL ST1 Stop 1211 or Surface Overhead Stop where required US32D TR3 Door Silencers 1229A (at Non-Fire Rated Openings) GREY TRSeal/Gasketing S188-BK (At Fire Rated Openings) BK ZE1 Magnetic Lock 2011 US28 DY1 Card Reader By Security Vendor1 Door Position Switch Sentrol 1078N – By Security Vendor1 Power Supply By Security Vendor1 Exit Push Button 6270 Series US32D DY1 Motion Sensor/Request to Exit GE-RCR-REX-W – By Security Vendor1 Set Wiring Diagrams By Security VendorBalance of Security Hardware by Security Vendor

NOTE: Coordinate wiring with related trades.NOTE: Overhead Stop – as required. Verify requirements.OPERATIONAL NOTE: Card Reader, tied to Security System, unlocks the magnetic lock allowing entry. Request to exit switch signals authorized exiting. Door position switch in magnetic lock monitors door position. Connect to a fire panel system so all doors will unlock during a fire emergency. Exit Push Button as auxiliary means to release magnetic lock. Free egress at all times. Tie both man trap doors together. If one door is open the other will remain locked.

SET #8 – Pair Storeroom Function Fire Rated – Doors 6C00, 6B2, 6C20

Hinges FBB168 Per Section 2 US26D ST1 Automatic Flush Bolt Set 3820 US26D TR1 Storeroom Function Lock 10G04 LB 626 SA1 Permanent Core To Suit Keying Requirements 626 SA2 Closers D4551 x Proper Arm AL ST1 Coordinator 3092 Series BL TR2 Stop 1211 or Surface Overhead Stop where required US32D TR1 Dust Proof Strike 1870 US26D AB1 Seal/Gasketing S188-BK (At Fire Rated Openings) BK ZE1 Astragal Set 55AA x 555AA AL ZE




Project No. 4587

GLAZING 088000 - 1

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Glass for doors and demountable partitions.2. Glass for existing aluminum windows.3. Glazing sealants and accessories.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 088700 "Architectural Window Films" for films applied to glazing systems.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.



B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square.

C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.


A. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.



Project No. 4587

GLAZING 088000 - 2

1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.


A. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the International Building Code and ASTM E 1300.

1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.



Project No. 4587

GLAZING 088000 - 3

2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.

3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual."2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.

D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.

E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.

2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.

B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

C. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

2.5 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.

1. Sealing System: Dual seals.



Project No. 4587

GLAZING 088000 - 4

2. Perimeter Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction .

2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.

2.7 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous

pressure.3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous

pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a

full bead of liquid sealant.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.



Project No. 4587

GLAZING 088000 - 5

D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

3.2 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.



Project No. 4587

GLAZING 088000 - 6

F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.3 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts that have been reglazed.



Project No. 4587

GLAZING 088000 - 7

1. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.

a. Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect.

2. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 783 at 1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article but not more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..

a. Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect.

3. Water Penetration: ASTM E 1105 at a minimum uniform static-air-pressure differential of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure differential specified for laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft., and shall not evidence water penetration.

C. The reglazing of the existing aluminum-framed windows will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.


A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.



Project No. 4587

GLAZING 088000 - 8

3.7 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type (G-1): Clear fully tempered float glass.

1. Minimum Thickness: 1/4 inch.2. Safety glazing required.3. Location: Non-fire-rated doors.

B. Glass Type (G-2): Clear fully tempered float glass.

1. Minimum Thickness: 1/2 inch.2. Safety glazing required.3. Location: Sliding door in demountable partition system.

3.8 DUEL GLAZED SYSTEM

A. Glass Type (G-3): Clear fully tempered float glass.

1. Outside lite: 3/8 inch.2. Inside lite: 1/4 inch.

a. Apply Architectural Window Film to inside lite.

3. Safety glazing required.4. Location: Demountable partition system.

3.9 INSULATING GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type (G-4): Low-E-coated, clear insulating glass.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Solarban 60 (2) Clear + Clear; PPG Industries, Inc.2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch.3. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm.4. Outdoor Lite: Annealed float glass.5. Interspace Content: Air.6. Indoor Lite: Annealed float glass.7. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface.8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29maximum.9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.27maximum.10. Visible Light Transmittance: 70percent minimum.11. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.39maximum.12. Location: Existing exterior windows at locations indicated on the Drawings.




Project No. 4587

DECORATIVE GLASS GLAZING 088113 - 1

SECTION 088113 - DECORATIVE GLASS GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Coated glass.

1.3 DEFINITION

A. Glass Thickness: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

1.4 COORDINATION




1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.



B. Shop Drawings: For decorative glass. Show fabrication and installation details. Include the following:

1. Size and location of penetrations.2. Glazing method.3. Mounting method.4. Attachments to other work.5. Full-size details of edge-finished profiles.



Project No. 4587


C. Glass Samples: For the following products, 12 inches square:

1. Each type of decorative glass.

D. Glazing Accessory Samples: For panel retainer, in 12-inchlengths.

E. Decorative Glazing Schedule: List decorative glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.



B. Product Certificates: For each type of decorative glass.

C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of decorative glass to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under NGA's Certified Glass Installer Program.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Protect decorative glass and glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Retain packaging and sequencing numbers for decorative-glass units.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install decorative glass until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is



Project No. 4587


operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings and construction contiguous with decorative glass by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain each type of decorative glass from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations for Mounting Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer, for each product and installation method.


A. General Performance: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Structural Performance: Decorative glass installed adjacent to walking surfaces shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Differential deflection of adjacent unsupported edges shall not exceed glass thickness when subjected to 50 lbf/ft.applied horizontally to one panel at any point up to 42 inchesabove the adjacent walking surface.

2. Base design on thickness at thinnest part of the glass.

C. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.


A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and "GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.



Project No. 4587


D. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with requirements indicated. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with requirements indicated. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.

2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.

B. Fully Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

C. Heat-Strengthened Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.


2.5 DECORATIVE GLASS PANELS (DGP-1)

A. Manufacturer: Skyline Design

1. Provide product as indicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.

2.6 GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Glazing Sealants, Tapes, and Miscellaneous Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."1. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.7 HARDWARE FOR GLASS INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: Glass panel retainer.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide single fin retainer system as manufactured by Fry Reglet.

2. Dimensions: 3/16" thick by 1-1/4" deep..3. Material and Finish: aluminum.

B. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed as recommended by manufacturer's written instructions.




Project No. 4587


C. Attachment strips: Manufacturer's standard, compatible with decorative glass type indicated.

D. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for hardware installation. Provide metal expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide stainless-steel anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated.

2.8 DECORATIVE-GLASS FABRICATION

A. Fabricate decorative glass and provide other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with product manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced glazing standard.

B. Edge Finishing: Finish edges smooth and polished, without chips, scratches, or warps.1. Finished Edge: Flat polished .

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine decorative-glass framing members, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Minimum required face or edge clearances.3. Effective sealing between joints of decorative-glass framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing retainers and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate orientation of outer surfaces as indicated on Drawings. Label or mark units as needed so that surface orientation is readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Set decorative-glass units in each series true in line with uniform orientation, pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

B. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that each outer surface faces the direction indicated on Drawings.



Project No. 4587


C. Set decorative glass in locations indicated on Drawings. Install glass with hardware and accessories according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions. Attach hardware securely to mounting surfaces and building structure.

D. Set decorative glass in locations indicated on Drawings.


A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, gaskets, sealants, tapes, and other glazing materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

C. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.


A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.


D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

3.6 DECORATIVE GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Decorative Glass (DGP-1): Coated glass with decorative glass paint or ink applied to glass surface and cured.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as indicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings. :

2. Glass Type: Custom colored float glass as selected by Architect from manufacturer's ful range.

3. Glass Thickness: as indicated on the Drawings.4. Coating Colors: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.5. Pattern: As indicated on the Drawings.




Project No. 4587

ARCHITECTURAL WINDOW FILMS 088700 - 1

SECTION 088700 - ARCHITECTURAL WINDOW FILMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Decorative Window Film


A. Section 088000 – Glazing: Windows to receive architectural window film

B. Section 102219 - Demountable Partitions: Wall system to receive the glazing with architectural film applied.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM)

1. ASTM E 903 - Standard Methods of Test for Solar Absorbance, Reflectance and Transmittance of Materials Using Integrating Spheres.

2. ASTM E 308 - Standard Recommended Practice for Spectophotometry and Description of Color in CIE 1931 System.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Product Data for specified products.

B. Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles, and product components, including dimensions, anchorage, and accessories.

C. Samples: 4 inch by 4 inch Samples of specified texture, color and/or pattern for verification.

D. Submit operation and maintenance data for installed products, including precautions against harmful cleaning materials and methods.

E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections.

a. Size: Minimum 10 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) for each type, color, and pattern.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.



Project No. 4587




A. Obtain all products in this section from a single Manufacturer with a minimum of 10 years’ experience.

B. Installer: Installation shall be performed by a trained and qualified installer, specialized and experienced in work required for this project. A list of experienced installation integrators is available at 3M.com/AMD or 3M Commercial Solutions Division at 1-888-650-3497.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

B. Store products protected from weather, temperature, and other harmful conditions as recommended by supplier.

C. Product must remain in original plastic bag and boxes and have storage conditions as follows:

1. 40 °F – 90 °F (4 °C – 32 °C)2. Out of direct sunlight3. Clean dry area4. Original container5. Do not stack boxes over six (6) units high. Excessive weight can damage the film6. Products are not recommended for interior applications where condensation consistently

occurs.7. Handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.8. Shelf life: 1 year

1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Confirm appropriate substrate is suitable for mounting of glass finish components prior to start of installation.

B. Apply materials when environmental conditions are within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer’s absolute limits. Application temperature range is 60 °F – 100 °F (16 °C – 38 °C).

C. Environmental Limitations: Do not install until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.



Project No. 4587


1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty document by authorized manufacturer.

B. Standard Product Warranty: Refer to the applicable 3M Technical Data Sheet for product warranty.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish 2 percent, but not less than 5 linft in full width, extra material at time of installation. Deliver in protective packaging for storage and label contents appropriately.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. 3M Company – Commercial Solutions Division [CSD]3M Center, Building 0220-12-E-04 St. Paul, MN 55144-1000, USA1-888-650-3497

2.2 MATERIAL STANDARD

A. Design based upon 3M™ FASARA™ Glass Finishes

2.3 DECORATIVE GLASS FILM

A. General: Glass and plastic finishes field-applied application to glass or plastic material as visual opaque or decorative film.

B. Description: provide products as indicated in the Finish Schedule on the drawings.

C. Film: Polyester

D. Decorative Pattern: Printed

1. Style and Color: As indicated in the Finish Schedule on the drawings.

E. Adhesive: Acrylic, Pressure Sensitive, Permanent

F. Liner: Silicone-coated Polyester

G. Thickness (Average) (Film and Adhesive without Liner): 3.2 mils (80 microns)

H. Fire Performance: Surface burning characteristics when tested in accordance with ASTM E84: Class A



Project No. 4587


1. Flame Spread: 25 maximum.2. Smoke Developed: 450 maximum.

I. Location: Apply film to interior room side of glazing system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrate(s) for compliance. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Refer to the applicable 3M Technical Data Sheet to determine compatibility of finish to substrate.

C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

D. Responsibility for state of surfaces prior to installation to be pre-determined by installation specialist.

E. Scheduling of installation by Owner or its representative implies that substrate and conditions are prepared and ready for product installation per the recommendations of the installation specialist.

F. Proceeding with installation implies installer’s acceptance of substrate and conditions.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Comply with all manufacturer’s instructions for surface preparation.

B. Thoroughly clean substrate of substances that could impair the overlay’s bond, including mold, mildew, oil, grease.

C. Re-clean surfaces with appropriate surface prep solvent and remove any haze or surface contamination.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Refer to the applicable 3M Installation Guide for specific application instructions.

B. Application must be performed by qualified installer.

C. Do not proceed with installation until all finishing work has been completed in and around the work area.

D. Verify pattern prior to material acquisition.



Project No. 4587


E. Comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.

F. Remove the liner and wet the adhesive prior to installation.

G. Install film to interior room side of glazing system.

H. Form smooth, wrinkle-free, bubble-free surface for finished installation.

I. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters and other defects. Use approved procedures to prevent the formation of air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters and other defects.

J. Residual water phenomenon may cause small water bubbles or clouding in the film that disappears as the water evaporates.

K. Refer to the applicable 3M Installation Guide for additional details.


A. Use cleaning methods recommended by architectural surfacing manufacturer for applicable environment.

B. Protect completed glass finish during remainder of construction period.

C. Consult with authorized installation specialist for project specifics.




Project No. 4587

FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 088813 - 1

SECTION 088813 - FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire-protection-rated glazing.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

1.4 COORDINATION




B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product; 12 inches square.

C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For installers.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of glass and glazing product, from manufacturer.

C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.



Project No. 4587



A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install fire-resistant glazing until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.



Project No. 4587



A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organization below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glazing with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, glass thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.

B. Ultraclear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear), with visible light transmission not less than 91 percent.

C. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated, Quality-Q3.


D. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.

1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer unless fire-protection or fire-resistance rating is based on another product.

2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness as needed to comply with requirements.3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING

A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on positive-pressure testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9, including the hose-stream test, and shall comply with NFPA 80.1. Fire-protection-rated glazing required to have a fire-protection rating of 20 minutes shall

be exempt from the hose-stream test.

B. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name; test standard; whether glazing is permitted to be used in doors or openings; if permitted in openings, whether or not glazing has passed the hose-stream test; whether or not glazing meets 450 deg F temperature-rise limitation; and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.



Project No. 4587


C. Laminated Ceramic Glazing: Laminated glass made from two plies of clear, ceramic glass; 8-mm total thickness; and complying with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

1. Manufacturer: Premium Grade FireLite Plus® as manufactured by Nippon Electric Glass Company, Ltd., and distributed by Technical Glass Products.

2.6 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

A. Provide glazing gaskets, glazing sealants, glazing tapes, setting blocks, spacers, edge blocks, and other glazing accessories that are compatible with glazing products and each other and are approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which products are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.

B. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated.

1. Sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.2. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

C. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous

pressure.3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous

pressure.

D. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a

full bead of liquid sealant.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.



Project No. 4587


B. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

C. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-protection rating indicated.

2.8 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners, and for compliance with minimum required face and edge clearances.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate fire side and protected side. Label or mark units as needed so that fire side and protected side are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed work.


A. Use methods approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products.

B. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.



Project No. 4587


D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face fire side or protected side as specified.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.



Project No. 4587


F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop, so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial washaway from glass.


A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.


D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.



Project No. 4587





Project No. 4587

FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - 1

SECTION 089119 - FIXED LOUVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fixed extruded-aluminum louvers.



1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.

B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.

C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.


A. Product Test Reports: Based on tests performed according to AMCA 500-L.

B. Sample warranties.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIXED EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS

A. Horizontal Drainable-Blade Louver :

1. Louver Depth: 6 inches.2. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.060 inch for blades and 0.080 inch

for frames.3. Mullion Type: Exposed.



Project No. 4587


4. Louver Performance Ratings (L-1):

a. Air Intake Louver for AHU-6C-1b. Free Area: Not less than 20 sq. ft.for 84-inch- wide by 66-inch- high louver. Verify

size in the field.c. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 900 fpm.d. Air Performance: Not more than 0.10-inch wg static pressure drop at 700-fpm free-

area intake velocity.


a. Discharge Louver for AHU-6C-1b. Free Area: Not less than 10 sq. ft.for 42-inch- wide by 66-inch- high louver. Verify

size in the field.c. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 900 fpm.d. Air Performance: Not more than 0.15-inch wg static pressure drop at 1000-fpm

free-area intake velocity.


a. Discharge Louver for EF-6C-2b. Free Area: Not less than 0.75 sq. ft.for 24-inch- wide by 12-inch- high louver. Verify

size in the field.c. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 900 fpm.d. Air Performance: Not more than 0.10-inch wg static pressure drop at 800-fpm free-

area intake velocity.

7. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

2.2 LOUVER SCREENS

A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.

1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face.2. Screening Type: Bird screening.

B. Louver Screen Frames: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached.

C. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers:

1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- square mesh, 0.063-inch wire.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005, with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.



Project No. 4587


C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

1. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.3. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.

D. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated from stainless-steel components, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M conducted by a qualified testing agency.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.

B. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds , threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.

2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacture's full range to match existing window frames..

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.

D. Protect unpainted galvanized- and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.



Project No. 4587


3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction, so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.




Project No. 4587

GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092116.23 - 1

SECTION 092116.23 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes gypsum board shaft wall assemblies.


A. Product Data: For each component of gypsum board shaft wall assembly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a testing and inspecting agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES

A. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated.

B. STC Rating: As indicated.

C. Gypsum Shaftliner Board:

1. Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; manufacturer's proprietary fire-resistive liner panels with paper faces, 1 inch thick, with double beveled long edges.

D. Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing, General: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated and complying with requirements for fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

E. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive, corner, and end members as follows:

1. Depth: As indicated.2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch.



Project No. 4587


F. Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with manufacturer's standard long-leg length, but at least 2 inches long and matching studs in depth.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch.

G. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

H. Finish Panels: Gypsum board as specified in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board." .

I. Sound Attenuation Blankets: As specified in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board."

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes as specified in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" that comply with gypsum board shaft wall assembly manufacturer's written instructions for application indicated.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on shaft wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded.

D. Reinforcing: Galvanized-steel reinforcing strips with 0.033-inch minimum thickness of base metal (uncoated).

E. Acoustical Sealant: Section 079219 "Acoustical Joint Sealants."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install gypsum board shaft wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated and manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Coordinate with gypsum board shaft wall assemblies so both elements of Work remain complete and undamaged.

D. Do not bridge building expansion joints with shaft wall assemblies; frame both sides of expansion joints with furring and other support.



Project No. 4587


E. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, wall-mounted door stops, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft wall assembly framing.

1. Elevator Hoistway: At elevator hoistway-entrance door frames, provide jamb struts on each side of door frame.

2. Reinforcing: Provide where items attach directly to shaft wall assembly as indicated on Drawings; accurately position and secure behind at least one layer of face panel.

F. Penetrations: Install supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons and floor indicators, and similar items.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels while maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction.

H. Firestop Tracks: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

I. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect while maintaining fire-resistance rating of gypsum board shaft wall assemblies.

J. Sound-Rated Shaft Wall Assemblies: Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly.

K. Gypsum Board Cants: At projections into shaft exceeding 4 inches, install gypsum board cants covering tops of projections.

L. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

M. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

END OF SECTION 092116.23



Project No. 4587

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions.2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits.




A. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks.

B. Evaluation reports for firestop tracks and post-installed anchors.


A. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing members are certified according to the product-certification program of the Certified Steel Stud Association, the Steel Framing Industry Association or the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated on Drawings, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.



Project No. 4587


2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.

B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645.

1. Steel Studs and Tracks:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following:

1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top track manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

D. Firestop Tracks: Top track manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.

F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.0538-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel.

G. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge-type steel sheet with minimum uncoated-

steel thickness of 0.0329 inch.3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter

wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.



Project No. 4587


2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate.

a. Uses: Securing hangers to structure.b. Type: adhesive anchor.c. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply

with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated.

D. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep.

2. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.

2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.



Project No. 4587


PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened.

C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.



Project No. 4587


3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

E. Direct Furring:

1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.3 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.

2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.

3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.



Project No. 4587


3. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.5. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts

that extend through forms.6. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.

F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.




Project No. 4587

GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.2. Tile backing panels.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling.

B. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.2. Long Edges: Tapered.



Project No. 4587


C. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.

1. Core: As indicated 5/8 inch, Type X.2. Long Edges: Tapered.3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges.

1. Core: As indicated on Drawings 5/8 inch, Type X.2. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet .

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead.b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.e. Expansion (control) joint.

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping drying-type, all-purpose compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.



Project No. 4587


3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping drying-type, all-purpose compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping drying-type, all-purpose compound.

5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

D. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

E. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS

A. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

B. Comply with ASTM C 840.

C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.



Project No. 4587


D. For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

4. Level 5: At locations to receive wall coverings and areas with glass-mat backing panels not covered by tile.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.




Project No. 4587

CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 1

SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Porcelain tile. 2. Crack isolation membrane. 3. Metal edge strips.


1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces.

2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for glass-mat, water-resistant backer board.



B. Samples for Verification:

1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths. 3. Metal Edge Protection in 6-inch lengths.



1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.



Project No. 4587



A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer is a five-star member of the National Tile Contractors Association or a Trowel of Excellence member of the Tile Contractors' Association of America.

2. Installer's supervisor for Project holds the International Masonry Institute's Foreman Certification.

3. Installer employs Ceramic Tile Education Foundation Certified Installers or installers recognized by the U.S. Department of Labor as Journeyman Tile Layers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.

C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

2.2 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Ceramic Tile Type (PWT-#, PFT-# and PWB-#): Unglazed porcelain tile.

1. Manufacturer and model as indicated on drawings. 2. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency. 3. Face Size: As indicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.. 4. Face Size Variation: Rectified.

5. Thickness: As indicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.. 6. Face: As indicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.. 7. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42 for PFT-#. 8. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designations .

9. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board as indicated in section 092900 Gypsum Board.

2.3 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.12 for high performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.



Project No. 4587


B. Fabric-Reinforced, Modified-Bituminous Sheet: Self-adhering, modified-bituminous sheet with fabric reinforcement facing; 0.040-inch nominal thickness.

2.4 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Medium-Bed, Modified Dry-Set Mortar: Comply with requirements in ANSI A118.15. Provide product that is approved by manufacturer for application thickness of 3/4 inch.

1. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site.

2. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.15.

2.5 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less.

1. Spectralock Pro Premium Grout as manufactured by Laticrete International, Inc. or approved equal.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shaped, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications; stainless-steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.

C. Metal Edge Protection (EP-1): Schluter strip as indicated on the drawings for use at all exposed edges of porcelain wall tile and as indicated.

D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

2.7 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.



Project No. 4587


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified.

b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding.

3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.

4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Install crack isolation membrane where concrete substrate has cracks in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

C. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains.

D. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.



Project No. 4587


3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.

1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:

a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile floors consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. c. Tile floors consisting of rib-backed tiles.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.

E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush.

F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.

2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints.

3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.

G. Joint Widths: As indicated on the drawings.

H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

I. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated.

J. Metal Edge Protection: Install on all outside corners of walls finished with tile and where indicated on the drawings.



Project No. 4587


3.4 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use modified dry-set mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate.

B. Allow crack isolation membrane to cure before installing tile or setting materials over it.


A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written

instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.

B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.

C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces.



Project No. 4587


3.8 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:

1. Ceramic Tile Installation : TCNA F113; medium-bed thinset mortar.

a. Ceramic Tile Type: PFT-#. b. Mortar: Medium-bed, modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.

B. Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring:

1. Ceramic Tile Installation : TCNA W245 or TCNA W248; thinset mortar on glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum backer board.

a. Ceramic Tile Type: PWT-# and PWB-#. b. Mortar: Medium -bed modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.




Project No. 4587

ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILINGS 095000 - 1

SECTION 095000 - ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILINGS

PART 1 - PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Section Includes Drawings and general conditions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Acoustical metal ceiling panels2. Exposed grid suspension system3. Wire hangers, fasteners, main runners, cross tees, and wall angle moldings4. Perimeter Trim5. Infill Panels

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM A 1008 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability

2. ASTM A 641 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire3. ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the

Hot-Dip Process 4. ASTM C 423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation

Room Method5. ASTM C 635 Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile

and Lay-in Panel Ceilings6. ASTM C 636 Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension

Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels7. ASTM D 3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of

Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber 8. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials9. ASTM E 580 Installation of Metal Suspension Systems in Areas Requiring Moderate

Seismic Restraint10. ASTM E 1111 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Interzone Attenuation of Ceilings

Systems11. ASTM E 1414 Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms

Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum 12. ASTM E 1264 Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products

B. International Building Code



Project No. 4587


C. ASHRAE Standard 62 1 2004 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality

D. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code

E. ASCE 7 American Society of Civil Engineers, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

F. International Code Council-Evaluation Services - AC 156 Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Qualification Testing of Non-structural Components

G. International Code Council-Evaluation Services Report - Seismic Engineer Report1. ESR 1308 - Armstrong Suspension Systems

H. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials - Seismic Engineer Report1. 1. 0244 - Armstrong Single Span Suspension System

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of acoustical ceiling unit and suspension system required.

B. Samples: Minimum 6 inch x 6 inch samples of specified acoustical panel; 8 inch long samples of exposed wall molding and suspension system, including main runner and 4 foot cross tees.

C. Shop Drawings: Layout and details of acoustical ceilings show locations of items that are to be coordinated with, or supported by the ceilings.

D. Certifications: Manufacturer's certifications that products comply with specified requirements, including laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and standards. For acoustical performance, each carton of material must carry an approved independent laboratory classification of NRC, CAC, and AC.

E. If the material supplied by the acoustical subcontractor does not have an Underwriter's Laboratory classification of acoustical performance on every carton, subcontractor shall be required to send material from every production run appearing on the job to an independent or NVLAP approved laboratory for testing, at the architect's or owner's discretion. All products not conforming to manufacturer's current published values must be removed, disposed of and replaced with complying product at the expense of the Contractor performing the work.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide acoustical panel units and grid components by a single manufacturer.

B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E 1264 Classification.



Project No. 4587


C. Acoustic Panels: As with other architectural features located at the ceiling, may obstruct or skew the planned fire sprinkler water distribution pattern through possibly delay or accelerate the activation of the sprinkler or fire detection systems by channeling heat from a fire either toward or away from the device. Consult a fire protection engineer, NFPA 13, or their local codes for guidance where automatic fire detection and suppression systems are present.

D. Coordination of Work: Coordinate acoustical ceiling work with installers of related work including, but not limited to building insulation, gypsum board, light fixtures, mechanical systems, electrical systems, and sprinklers.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in any way.


A. Do not install interior ceilings until space is enclosed and weatherproof; wet work in place is completed and nominally dry; work above ceilings is complete; and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity are continuously maintained at values near those intended for final occupancy. Building areas to receive ceilings shall be free of construction dust and debris.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Acoustical Panel: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace panels that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Acoustical Panels: Sagging and warping2. Grid System: Rusting and manufacturer's defects

B. Warranty Period:

1. Acoustical Metal panels: One (1) year from date of substantial completion2. Grid: One (1) year from date of substantial completion

C. The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents.



Project No. 4587


1.9 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed. Packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels.

1. Acoustical Metal Ceiling Units: Furnish quality of full-size units equal to 5.0 percent of amount installed.

2. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed suspension component equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical metal ceiling panel and its supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS (C-4)

A. Description: provide products as indicated in the Finish Schedule on the drawings.

B. Color:As indicated in the Finish Schedule.

C. Edge/Joint Detail: As indicated by manufacturer's designation.

D. Thickness: As indicated in the Finish Schedule.

E. Thickness: As indicated in the Finish Schedule.

F. Modular Size: 600 by 600 mm 600 by 1200 mm As indicated in the Finish Schedule.

G. Infill Panel: Manufacture's standard 1-inch thick fiberglass infill panel wrapped in plastic.

H. Accessories: Furnish and install all trim and edge caps required for a complete installed system. All trim and edge caps to be provided by same manufacturer as metal ceiling system.

1. Infill Metal Panel Trim: Effects Wood Looks Trim by Armstrong.2. Edge Cap for cut vector panels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not proceed with installation until all wet work such as concrete, terrazzo, plastering and painting has been completed and thoroughly dried out.



Project No. 4587


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less than half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans. Coordinate panel layout with mechanical and electrical fixtures.

B. Coordination: Furnish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other sections.

C. Furnish concrete inserts and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordination of other work.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Follow manufacturer installation instructions

B. Install suspension system and panels in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and in compliance with ASTM C 636 and with the authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Install wall moldings at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces. Miter corners where wall moldings intersect or install corner caps.

D. For reveal edge panels: Cut and reveal or rabbet edges of ceiling panels at border areas and vertical surfaces.

E. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspended system, with edges resting on flanges of main runner and cross tees. Cut and fit panels neatly against abutting surfaces. Support edges by wall moldings.

F. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspended system, with edges resting on flanges of main runner and cross tees. Cut and fit panels neatly against abutting surfaces. Support edges by wall moldings.


A. Replace damaged and broken panels.

B. Clean exposed surfaces of ceilings panels, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

END OF SECTION 095000END OF SECTION 095000



Project No. 4587

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1

SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings.





B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved.

B. Product test reports.

C. Research reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264.2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.



Project No. 4587


2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS (C-#)


B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Manufacturer's standard panels according to ASTM E 1264.

C. Color: As indicated in the schedule..

D. Edge/Joint Detail: As indicated in the schedule.

E. Thickness: As indicated in the schedule.

F. Modular Size: As indicated in the schedule .

2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM


B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension system and accessories according to ASTM C 635/C 635M.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

2.5 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless otherwise indicated.

B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items.



Project No. 4587


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.




Project No. 4587

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Thermoset-rubber base.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following periods:1. 48 hours before installation.2. During installation.3. 48 hours after installation.



Project No. 4587


B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.2 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE (RB-#)

A. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid, homogeneous).

1. Style and Location:

a. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas indicated.

B. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

C. Height: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

E. Outside Corners: Preformed.

F. Inside Corners: Preformed.

G. Colors: As indicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.



Project No. 4587


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.



Project No. 4587


F. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces.2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly.3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.




Project No. 4587

RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 - 1

SECTION 096516 - RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Unbacked vinyl sheet flooring.



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of resilient sheet flooring.

1. Include sheet flooring layouts, locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

2. Show details of special patterns.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color, texture, and pattern specified, in manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch sections.

1. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches long, of each color required.

D. Welded-Seam Samples: For seamless-installation technique indicated and for each resilient sheet flooring product, color, and pattern required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project.




A. Maintenance Data: For each type of resilient sheet flooring to include in maintenance manuals.



Project No. 4587



A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Resilient Sheet Flooring: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each type, color, and pattern of flooring installed.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for resilient sheet flooring installation and seaming method indicated.

1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer for installation techniques required.



a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, color, and pattern in locations directed by Architect.




A. Store resilient sheet flooring and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store rolls upright.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 85 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient sheet flooring during the following periods:

1. 48 hours before installation.2. During installation.3. 48 hours after installation.



Project No. 4587



C. Close spaces to traffic during resilient sheet flooring installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after resilient sheet flooring installation.

E. Install resilient sheet flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient sheet flooring, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

2.2 UNBACKED VINYL SHEET FLOORING (RS-# and RSB-#))

A. Product Standard: ASTM F 1913.


C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.

D. Sheet Width: 6.6 feet.

E. Seamless-Installation Method: Heat welded.

F. Colors and Patterns: As indicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.


A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers to suit resilient sheet flooring and substrate conditions indicated.

C. Seamless-Installation Accessories:

1. Heat-Welding Bead: Manufacturer's solid-strand product for heat welding seams.

a. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to Match flooring.



Project No. 4587


D. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories:

1. Cove Strip: 1-inch radius provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer.2. Cap Strip: Tapered vinyl cap provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring

manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient sheet flooring.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to resilient sheet flooring manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient sheet flooring.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives

and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 10 pH.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 1000 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas.

a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.



Project No. 4587


D. Do not install resilient sheet flooring until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move flooring and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient sheet flooring.

3.3 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient sheet flooring.

B. Unroll resilient sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting.

C. Lay out resilient sheet flooring as follows:

1. Maintain uniformity of flooring direction.2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least

6 inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.3. Match edges of flooring for color shading at seams.4. Avoid cross seams.

D. Scribe and cut resilient sheet flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend resilient sheet flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on resilient sheet flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

G. Adhere resilient sheet flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

H. Seamless Installation:

1. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead to fuse sections permanently into a seamless flooring installation. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces.

I. Integral-Flash-Cove Base: Cove resilient sheet flooring to dimension indicated up vertical surfaces. Support flooring at horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient sheet flooring.



Project No. 4587


B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient sheet flooring installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces.2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient sheet flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover resilient sheet flooring until Substantial Completion.




Project No. 4587

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 1

SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid vinyl floor tile.2. Vinyl composition floor tile.



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of resilient floor tile.

1. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

2. Show details of special patterns.

C. Samples: Full-size units of each color, texture, and pattern of floor tile required.

D. Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.




A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and

pattern of floor tile installed.



Project No. 4587



A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated.

1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required.



a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, color, and pattern in locations directed by Architect.




A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following periods:

1. 48 hours before installation.2. During installation.3. 48 hours after installation.


C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.



Project No. 4587


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient floor tile, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

2.2 SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE (LVT-#)

A. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1700.

1. Class: Class III, Printed Film Vinyl Tile.2. Type: B, Embossed Surface.


C. Size: As idicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.

D. Colors and Patterns: As idicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.

2.3 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE (RT-#)

A. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through pattern.

B. Wearing Surface: Smooth.

C. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

D. Size: 12 by 12 inches.

E. Colors and Patterns: As idicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.


A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.

C. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by floor tile manufacturer.



Project No. 4587


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives

and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 1000 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas.

a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install floor tiles until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed.1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation

materials into spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile.



Project No. 4587


3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles in pattern indicated.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

1. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

H. Adhere floor tiles to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces.2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Floor Polish for vinyl composition floor tile: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply three coat(s).



Project No. 4587


E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.




Project No. 4587

RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 - 1

SECTION 096723 - RESINOUS FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes resinous flooring systems.





B. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.


A. Material certificates.

B. Material test reports.




A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting resinous flooring application.

B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring application.



Project No. 4587


C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for 24 hours after application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. VOC Content of Liquid-Applied Flooring Components: Not more than 100 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Flammability: Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D 635.

2.2 RESINOUS FLOORING

A. Resinous Flooring System: Abrasion-, impact-, and chemical-resistant, aggregate-filled, and resin-based monolithic floor surfacing designed to produce a seamless floor and integral cove base.

1. Manufacturer and Product: As indicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.

B. System Characteristics:

1. Color and Pattern: As indicated in Finish Schedule on the Drawings.2. Wearing Surface: As indicated in Finish Schedule on the Drawings .3. Overall System Thickness: 40 mils .

C. Primer: Type recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer for substrate and resinous flooring system indicated.

D. Reinforcing Membrane: Flexible resin formulation that is recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer.

E. Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring manufacturer and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.

F. Body Coats:

1. Resin: Urethane Membrane.2. Formulation Description: 100 percent solids.3. Type: Pigmented.4. Application Method: Troweled or screeded.5. Number of Coats: One.6. Thickness of Coats: Manufacturer's standard.7. Aggregates: Manufacturer's standard .

8. Resin: Epoxy.9. Formulation Description: 100 percent solids.10. Type: Pigmented.11. Number of Coats: One.



Project No. 4587


12. Thickness of Coats: Manufacturer's standard.13. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.

G. System Physical Properties: Provide resinous flooring system with the following minimum physical property requirements when tested according to test methods indicated:

1. Tensile Strength: 1,200 psi minimum according to ASTM D-412.2. Elongation: 200% according to ASTM D-412.3. Hardness: 70 minimum according to ASTM D-2240, Shore A.4. Abrasion Resistance: 0.06 gm minimum in according to ASTM D-4060, CS-17.5. Water Absorption: 0.1%percent maximum according to ASTM C 413.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare and clean substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry substrate for resinous flooring application.

B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with resinous flooring.

1. Roughen concrete substrates as follows:a. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains

the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup.

b. Comply with ASTM C 811 requirements unless manufacturer's written instructions are more stringent.

2. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions.

a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with application of resinous flooring only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. of slab area in 24 hours.

b. Plastic Sheet Test: ASTM D 4263. Proceed with application only after testing indicates absence of moisture in substrates.

c. Relative Humidity Test: Use in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

4. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Verify that concrete substrates have pH within acceptable range. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing.

C. Patching and Filling: Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions.



Project No. 4587


D. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated.

1. Expansion and Isolation Joint Treatment: At substrate expansion and isolation joints, comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Primer: Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

C. Reinforcing Membrane: Apply reinforcing membrane to substrate cracks.

D. Integral Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces before applying flooring. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions. Round internal and external corners.

1. Integral Cove Base: height as indicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.

E. Self-Leveling Body Coats: Apply self-leveling slurry body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system.

1. Aggregates: Broadcast aggregates at rate recommended by manufacturer and, after resin is cured, remove excess aggregates to provide surface texture indicated.

F. Troweled or Screeded Body Coats: Apply troweled or screeded body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system. Hand or power trowel and grout to fill voids. When body coats are cured, remove trowel marks and roughness using method recommended by manufacturer.

G. Grout Coat: Apply grout coat, of type recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer, to fill voids in surface of final body coat.

H. Topcoats: Apply topcoats in number indicated for flooring system and at spreading rates recommended in writing by manufacturer and to produce wearing surface indicated.

I. Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period.




Project No. 4587

WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 1

SECTION 097200 - WALL COVERINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Vinyl wall covering.



B. Samples: For each type of wall covering and for each color, pattern, texture, and finish specified, full width by 36-inch- long in size.


A. Product test reports.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Low-Emitting Materials: Wall-covering system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.



Project No. 4587


2.2 VINYL WALL COVERING (WC-1)

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings.

B. Description: Provide products in rolls from same production run and complying with the following:

1. FS CCC-W-408D and CFFA-W-101-D for Type II, Medium -Duty products.

C. Total Weight: manufacture's standard, excluding coatings.

D. Width: 52 inches.

E. Backing: Nonwoven fabric.

F. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: as indicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, strippable adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application indicated and as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.

1. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.

B. Primer/Sealer: Mildew resistant, complying with requirements in and recommended in writing by primer/sealer and wall-covering manufacturers for intended substrate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt, oil, grease, mold, mildew, and incompatible primers.

C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects.

1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter.

2. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer.

3. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding.

D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finish with fine sandpaper.



Project No. 4587


E. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items.

F. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation.

3.2 WALL-COVERING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.

B. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change the roll numbers at partition breaks and corners.

C. Install strips in same order as cut from roll.

D. Install wall covering without lifted or curling edges and without visible shrinkage.

E. Match pattern 72 inches above the finish floor.

F. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 3 inches from inside corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. Horizontal seams are not permitted.

G. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without overlaps or gaps between strips.

H. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects.

I. Remove excess adhesive at seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.

J. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items.




Project No. 4587

FABRIC-WRAPPED PANELS 097723 - 1

SECTION 097723 - FABRIC-WRAPPED PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes shop-fabricated, fabric-wrapped wall panels.





B. Shop Drawings: For panel assembly and installation.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.


A. Product certificates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Panels shall comply with "Surface-Burning Characteristics" or "Fire Growth Contribution" Subparagraph below, or both, as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.



Project No. 4587


b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

2. Fire Growth Contribution: Comply with acceptance criteria of local code and authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 265 Method B Protocol or NFPA 286.

2.2 FABRIC-WRAPPED WALL PANELS

A. Fabric-Wrapped Wall Panel : Manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of facing material stretched over front face of edge-framed core and bonded or attached to edges and back of frame.

1. Mounting: Edge mounted with splines secured to substrate.2. Mounting: Back mounted with manufacturer's standard impaling clips, secured to

substrate.3. Core: Mineral-fiber board .4. Edge Construction: Manufacturer's standard chemically hardened core with no frame.5. Edge Profile: Square.6. Corner Detail in Elevation: Square with continuous edge profile indicated.7. Reveals between Panels: Flush reveals .8. Facing Material: As indicated on Drawings.9. Nominal Overall Panel Thickness: 1/2 inch.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Core Materials:

1. Tackable Mineral-Fiber Board: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 10, respectively.

B. Facing Material (TPF-1): Fabric from same dye lot; color and pattern as indicated on Drawings.

1. Applied Treatments: Stain resistance.2. Lining Material: Manufacturer's standard fabric for each use indicated.

C. Mounting Devices: Concealed on back of panel, recommended by manufacturer to support weight of panel, and as follows:

1. Adhesives: As recommended by panel manufacturer and with a VOC content of 70 g/L or less.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Standard Construction: Use manufacturer's standard construction unless otherwise indicated; with facing material applied to face, edges, and back border of dimensionally stable core; and with rigid edges to reinforce panel perimeter against warpage and damage.

B. Core-Face Layer: Evenly stretched over core face and edges and securely attached to core; free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, or sags.



Project No. 4587


C. Facing Material and Lining Material: Apply fabric fully covering visible surfaces of panel; with material stretched straight, on the grain, tight, square, and free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams, adhesive, or other visible distortions or foreign matter.

1. Fabrics with Directional or Repeating Patterns or Directional Weave: Mark fabric top and attach fabric in same direction so pattern or weave matches in adjacent panels.

D. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Panels: Plus or minus 1/16 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install panels in locations indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, install panels with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other panels, faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installation of panels using type of mounting devices indicated. Mount panels securely to supporting substrate.

C. Align fabric pattern and grain with adjacent panels.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials.

B. Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.




Project No. 4587

INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

B. Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft..b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.



Project No. 4587


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co.2. Duron, Inc.3. M.A.B. Paints.4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, paints and coatings shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits:

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 150 g/L.4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L.5. Rust-Preventive Coatings: 100 g/L.6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 100 g/L.7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.8. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.9. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.

D. Low-Emitting Materials: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, 90 percent of paints and coatings shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

E. Colors: As indicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings..

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=11642&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123457035134&mf=04&src=wd






Project No. 4587


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent.3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent.4. Wood: 15 percent.5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.6. Plaster: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."

B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

C. Stencil Painted Signs: Apply stencil painted signs on both sides of all fire rated partitions and smoke barrier partitions. Locate bottom of signs no more than 12 inches above removable ceilings. Repeat application at maximum horizontal spacing of 10 feet and at every intersecting room partition.



Project No. 4587


1. Provide stencil painted signs with the following messages corresponding new and existing walls:a. “1 HOUR RATED WALL”b. “2 HOUR RATED WALL”c. “SMOKE BARRIER WALL”

2. Or appropriate combination as:a. “HOUR RATED WALL AND SMOKE BARRIER”

3. Use stencils with all capital figures and letters that are 3” high. Color of sign figures and letters is to be bright red.

3.4 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Steel Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 5.1S:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust inhibitive, water based MPI #107.b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat.c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss

Level 5), MPI #147.

B. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 9.2M:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149.b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat.c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #144.

1) Location: ceilings.

d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #145.

1) Location: Walls, unless noted otherwise.

2. Epoxy-Modified Latex System MPI INT 9.2F:

a. Location: Walls in toilet rooms and lab areas.b. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50.c. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy-modified latex, matching topcoat.d. Topcoat: Epoxy-modified latex, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #215.




Project No. 4587

CUBICLE CURTAINS AND TRACK 102123 - 1

SECTION 102123 - CUBICLE CURTAINS AND TRACK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cubicle-curtain tracks and carriers.




A. Operation and maintenance data.


A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Curtains: Full-size units equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each size indicated, but no fewer than two units.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Cubicle Curtains: Provide curtain fabrics with the following characteristics:

1. Laundering: Launderable to a water temperature of not less than 160 deg F.2. Flame Resistance: Provide fabrics identical to those that have passed NFPA 701 when

tested by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Identify fabrics with appropriate markings of a qualified testing agency.



Project No. 4587


2.2 CUBICLE-CURTAIN SUPPORT SYSTEMS

A. Extruded-Aluminum Curtain Track: Not less than 1-1/4 inches wide by 3/4 inch high .

1. Curved Track: Factory-fabricated, 12-inch- radius bends.2. Finish: Baked enamel, acrylic, or epoxy.

B. Curtain Track Accessories: Fabricate splices, end caps, connectors, end stops, coupling and joining sleeves, wall flanges, brackets, ceiling clips, and other accessories from same material and with same finish as track.

1. End Stop: Removable with carrier hook.

C. Curtain Glide Carriers: One-piece nylon glide with chrome-plated steel hook.

D. Exposed Fasteners: Stainless steel.

E. Concealed Fasteners: Stainless steel.

2.3 CURTAINS

A. Manufacturer: As indicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.

B. Fabric: Curtain manufacturer's standard, 100 percent polyester; inherently and permanently flame resistant, stain resistant, and antimicrobial.

1. Pattern: As indicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.2. Width: As indicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.3. Color: As indicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.

C. Curtain Grommets: Two-piece, rolled-edge, rustproof, nickel-plated brass; spaced not more than 6 inches o.c.; machined into top hem.

D. Mesh Top: Not less than 20-inch- high mesh top.

1. Mesh: No. 50 nylon mesh.

E. Curtain Tieback: Nickel-plated brass chain; one at each curtain termination.

2.4 CURTAIN FABRICATION

A. Continuous Curtain Panels:

1. Width: Equal to track length from which curtain is hung plus 10 percent of added fullness, but not less than 12 inches of added fullness.

2. Length: Equal to floor-to-ceiling height, minus depth of track and carrier at top, and minus clearance above the finished floor of 12 inches .



Project No. 4587


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install tracks level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. For tracks of up to 20 feet in length, provide track fabricated from single, continuous length.

1. Curtain-Track Mounting: Surface.

C. Track Accessories: Install splices, end caps, connectors, end stops, coupling and joining sleeves, and other accessories as required for a secure and operational installation.

D. Curtain Carriers: Provide curtain carriers adequate for 6-inch spacing along full length of curtain plus an additional carrier.

E. Cubicle Curtains: Hang curtains on each curtain track. Secure with curtain tieback.




Project No. 4587

DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS 102219 - 1

SECTION 102219 – DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Structural wall framing system

B. Wall skins.

C. Frames for doors and glazed openings.

D. Doors and door hardware.

E. Glass and Glazing.

F. Misc. trims for junctions and building interface.

G. Acoustic insulation.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Division 08: Door Hardware

B. Division 08: Glass and Glazing

C. Division 08: Architectural Window Films

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI/BIFMA

1. Wall units will support a maximum load of 331 lbs. per linear foot per side in compliance with ANSI/BIFMA X 5.6.

B. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials

1. Wall assemblies shall comply with flammability requirements in accordance with ASTM E84 “Standard Method for Surface Characteristics of Building Materials”. This test method is technically equivalent to that specified in NFPA No. 225, UBC No. 8-1, ANSI/UL 723 and ASTM E 84-97a.

2. All solid and framed glass systems are in compliance with ASTM E 72 “Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction”.

3. Glazed wall sound attenuation capabilities using double glazed frames shall be a minimum of 44 STC with ¼” tempered glass and 3/8” tempered glass.



Project No. 4587


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. The basis for all bids in this section shall be V.I.A.™, as designed and manufactured by Steelcase, Grand Rapids, MI. Other wall systems which meet this criteria may bid providing that all applicable product specifications, details and certified independent laboratory test reports have been submitted and approved by the architect or owner. This submission is to clearly outline areas of compliance and area of failure to comply with function and performance specified.

B. Submit detailed shop drawings, showing all elements of the system, including fabrication and installation details, fastenings, accessories, types of material and finishes.

C. Shop drawings to include product reference detail to link individual wall components to factory orders and packing lists.

D. Product certification of compliance with specified performance characteristics and criteria, and physical requirements.

E. Manufacturer’s installation and assembly instructions.


A. Warranty documents as specified.

B. Maintenance data.


A. Installation shall be by manufacturer’s or a qualified dealer's trained personnel.

B. Supplier shall take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of the work.

1.7 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. Deliver wall components containerized, cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit. Include with bid any necessary storage precautions required for the product being offered.



Project No. 4587


B. Installation shall not commence until building is enclosed and climate controlled, and finishing operations, including adjacent walls, ceiling (including lighting, sprinklers & HVAC), floor-covering and painting, are complete.

C. Relocatable wall installer to inspect partition components upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided the finish items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the owner’s representative. Remove and replace damaged items as described.

D. It shall be the responsibility of the wall supplier to properly package all components for storage and define storage program to be provided on site by General Contractor at no charge, to ensure product performance.

E. Relocatable wall components shall be tagged and labeled with identification numbers that correspond to product reference numbers as called out on shop drawings.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty document. Product shall be covered under limited lifetime warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCT

2.1 BASIS OF DESIGN MANUFACTURERS AND MODELS

A. Steelcase – Grand Rapids, MI 49508 Model: V.I.A.™

1. Refer to manufacturer's drawings at the end of this section.

2.2 RELOCATABLE WALL SYSTEM

A. Relocatable, non-progressive, capable of four direction lateral expansion with reusable components.

1. Wall Thickness: 4” nominal2. Wall height: As noted on drawings3. Vertical and horizontal joinery: ¼” reveal4. Utility Wireways: Provide access through structural framing, junctions, end conditions and

utility panels.

B. Performance Requirements

1. Solid painted wall assemblies to have a Class-A rating in accordance with ASTM E84-97a “Standard Method for Surface Characteristics of Building Materials”.

2. All solid and framed glass systems are in compliance with ASTM E 72 “Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction”.

3. Solid wall sound attenuation capabilities will range from a minimum (requiring no field additive insulation or gaskets) of 42 STC to a maximum STC level of 52.



Project No. 4587


4. Glazed wall sound attenuation capabilities will range from a minimum of 30 STC to a maximum STC level of 33 for single glazed construction, and will range from a minimum of 42 STC to a maximum STC level of 44 for double glazed construction.

5. Solid wall units will support a maximum load of 331 pounds per linear foot per side in compliance with ANSI/BIFMAX5.6.

C. Wall design will accommodate ceiling heights up to 12’-0”.

D. Solid skins and glass frames shall be vertically oriented up to 142” high or landscape oriented up to 120” wide

E. Vertically oriented skins and glass frames shall be a maximum of 60” wide. Landscape oriented skins and glass frames shall be a maximum of 60” high

F. Design must permit extension in two, three or four way conditions without removal of adjacent panels or floor track

G. All solid and fabric skins shall be capable of field cutting to accommodate end filler conditions or other modifications to overall partition length

H. The system shall provide a 3” vertical adjustment (+/-1½ ") in overall height to accommodate floor and ceiling irregularities, allowing for a maximum of +/- 3/4 " at the floor and +/- 3/4 " at the ceiling, including wall assemblies, doors and door frames.

2.3 WALL COMPONENTS

A. Solid skins shall be ¾” thick, with surfaces of powder coat painted steel (22 gauge), fabric wrapped steel, veneer, or laminate (LPL or HPL), enclosing a particle board substrate.

B. Skin options to include slatwall for mounting of accessories and worktools

C. End fillers for relocatable wall adjacent to fixed walls and columns shall be similar in construction to solid wall skins and fit into end channel on the abutting wall. End channels and Mini-ends will include a continuous light and sound seal.

D. End fillers may utilize solid skins that are field cut to narrower unit width as indicated on drawings. Cut skins will be manufactured in the same manner and with same materials as all other solid skins.

E. Skins, glass frames and corresponding framing elements shall be manufactured in widths as indicated on shop drawings.

F. Solid skins and glass frames shall be mounted to structural frame by engaging an operable mechanical bracket that securely engages the framing components. The mechanical bracket will be designed to ensure that un-engaged brackets are easily identified.

G. The installation and removal of solid skins shall require a special tool to limit accessibility to authorized personnel and to ensure security.

H. Solid skins shall be removable for access to wall cavity to facilitate electrical installation and inspection.



Project No. 4587


I. Solid skins shall be interchangeable with glass frames of equal sizes, and vice versa.

2.4 STRUCTURAL FRAMING COMPONENTS

A. Structural framing posts will include a threaded leveler for adjusting to floor variations

B. Ceiling track shall be one-piece continuous formed steel with continuous factory- installed resilient light and sound.

C. Primary structural components will be formed of 16 gauge steel.

D. Horizontal and vertical framing components will be joined with 11 gauge corner brackets.

E. Vertical structural framing components shall incorporate integral slotting for direct mounting of panel-hung components on either or both sides of the wall, including side-by-side mounting. Continuous seals will conceal all slots. Structural framing components shall allow for direct mounting of panel-hung furniture without the need for any additive, field installed components. Structural framing can accommodate the direct interface of overhead storage and shelving without the use of any additional adapter/transition brackets.

F. Slotting will allow for wall mounted components to be positioned vertically at 1” increments from 18” to 120” AFF.

G. The system shall allow for installation on hard surface, or carpeted flooring, without the use of mechanical fasteners (in non-seismic applications).

H. The system can be installed to the underside of suspended ceilings without the use of destructive fasteners, with a one-piece continuous steel ceiling track.

I. Structural framing elements will be factory prepared for all connections and joinery hardware, and pre-punched for cable management.

J. Structural posts will be factory punched to optimize all required segmentation configurations, so that posts are interchangeable and share common hole locations.

K. Framing components to include factory applied polypropylene gaskets to serve as light and sound seals between the relocatable wall and fixed architectural elements.

2.5 DOOR COMPONENTS

A. Slide Door Units shall include fascia, header and track, finished opening frame, and sliding door. Track Shall be aluminum. Roller assemblies will be steel, with high quality ball bearing wheels. Hardware assembly to include pneumatic braking mechanism.

B. Slide door frames and door leaves to be capable of receiving automatic door bottoms for improved sound control.

C. Slide door track will be fully supported by wall structure, without requiring additional structural support from other architectural elements.



Project No. 4587


D. Polished glass doors to be ½” thick tempered glass. Doors shall be prepared and pre-drilled for hardware as specified in section 087100 Door Hardware.

E. Hardware shall be

1. Furnished and installed by the relocatable wall manufacturer.

F. The following hardware is to be furnished and installed by the relocatable wall contractor:

1. Slide door track, hardware, door pull and/or lock.

G. Hardware finish shall be specified in section 087100 Door Hardware.

H. Cylinders and cores that are configured to specific master-key requirements will be provided and installed by others – see Division 08- Door Hardware.

2.6 GLAZED OPENING COMPONENTS

A. All glass frames to be flush glazed.

B. Captured glass frame assemblies shall accommodate single glazed or double glazed configurations. Single glazed assemblies shall be capable of retrofit to double glazed, and vice-versa.

C. The structural frame and glass frame configuration will allow for glass frames to be exchanged for solid skins and vice-versa, without having to alter the structural frame components.

D. Captured glass frames shall be pre-glazed prior to arriving at site.

E. All glass framing components will be constructed of extruded aluminum, either powder coat paint and/or clear anodized as called for in finish schedule.

F. All glass and glazing for relocatable walls shall be furnished under this section.

G. All unitized glass shall be factory installed using extruded non-PVC glazing strips. Foam tape or PVC glazing is not acceptable.

H. All glass shall comply with Federal Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials (16 CFR, Part 1201).

I. Glass Types: as specified in Section 088000 - Glazing.

J. Glass Film Types: as specified in Section 088700 - Architectural Window Films.

2.7 MATERIALS

A. All metal painted panel surfaces, glass frames, doorframes, base trim and ceiling track will be cold-formed steel or extruded aluminum.



Project No. 4587


B. Where noted in drawings, aluminum will be extruded aluminum (6063-T6 Aluminum alloy) with a clear anodized finish.

C. All glass shall comply with Federal Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials (16 CFR, Part 1201).

D. Light and sound seals to be polypropylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that building conditions are ready to receive wall components and that field measurement dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Verify that floor level does not vary by more than plus/minus ¾” from specified height.

C. Verify that ceiling level does not vary by more than plus/minus ¾” from specified height.

D. Verify that adjacent surfaces do not exceed 1/8 inch in 8'-0" variation from plumb.

E. Verify that floor flatness complies with the American Concrete Institute (ACI) floor flatness (FF) requirements per AC117 and ASTM E1155 for Moderately Flat floors (maximum of 3/8” gap over 90% of samples and 5/8” gap over 100%).

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Walls shall be installed without permanent fastenings over finished floor tile, carpeting or raised floor to provide for complete flexibility of future changes without having to patch floor material (unless required for door/hardware operation, or to meet structural or code requirements).

B. Partition shall be scribed and neatly fitted to existing building conditions all in accordance with details approved on shop drawings

C. Installer to provide touch-up of all nicks and scratches that may occur to the wall during handling and installation with touch up paint supplied by the manufacturer in matching color.

D. Installation shall not commence until building is enclosed and finishing operations, including ceiling, floor-covering and painting, are complete.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of work, this contractor shall remove all of his cartons, trash, crates, etc. and leave the premises broom clean.

B. Washdown of walls shall not be part of this section, but shall be considered normal pre-occupancy cleaning responsibility of G.C., owner or occupant.



Project No. 4587


3.4 MAINTENANCE

A. It shall be the responsibility of the relocatable wall bidder to include in this proposal, the location of the nearest service facility established to service occupant changes of material requirements.


6C12

EX

AM

PR

OC

ED

UR

E/

O V

DIS

CH

AR

GE

STO

RA

GE

PAC

S

6C11

ZEN

VIT

ALS

&

6C17

6C19

MEMM20A0

MEMM20A0

V40

.000

/92.

858R

D53

AD

AC

14' -

10-1

/2"

Ele

vatio

n A

CS

eal F

inis

h - 6

249:

PLA

TIN

UM

SO

LID

STC

Per

form

ance

- D

oubl

e S

eals

Ele

vatio

n A

DS

eal F

inis

h - 6

249:

PLA

TIN

UM

SO

LID

STC

Per

form

ance

- D

oubl

e S

eals

Ski

n E

leva

tion

91.7

17" H

43.6

82" W

DE

B42

G1D

51

6500

-C

D8D

A5

T8336

DE

E38

D58

10

91.7

17" H

43.6

82" W

92.8

58" H

40.0

00" W

D23

E3

6500

-A

L61A

F92

.858

" H40

.000

" W

91.7

17" H

43.6

82" W

6500

-A

L61A

F

6500

-A

91.7

17" H

43.6

82" W

6500

-C

91.7

17" H

43.6

82" W

G1D

51G

1D51

91.7

17" H

43.6

82" W

6500

T8336

G1D

51

6500

G1D

51

6500

-C

T2F95

G1D

51D

EB

42

T2F95

7' -10"

Scal

e: 3

/16"

= 1

'

k:\H

EA

LTH

& H

OS

PIT

AL

CO

RP

\Met

ropo

litan

FILE

:

XX

XX

XX

X

NO

TE!

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

N

SC

ALE

:

CLI

EN

T:X

X/X

X/X

X

XX

/XX

/XX

Met

ropo

litan

Hos

pita

l - Z

EN

RO

OM

03.1

6.17

SH

EE

T#:

XX

/XX

/XX

k:\H

EA

LTH

& H

OS

PIT

AL

CO

RP

\Met

ropo

litan

SA

LES

:

RE

VIS

ION

S

XX

XX

XX

X

3/16

"=1'

-0"

TITL

E:

DAT

E:

TYP

ICA

L FR

ON

T - V

IA W

all w

/ Int

egra

l Slid

erN

O.

CA

THE

SE

DR

AWIN

GS

AR

E T

HE

CO

NFI

DE

NTI

AL

PR

OP

ER

TY O

F W

ALD

NE

RS

BU

SIN

ES

S E

NV

IRO

NM

EN

TS. T

O B

E R

ETU

RN

ED

UP

ON

RE

QU

ES

T, N

OT

TO B

E D

ISC

LOS

ED

TO

OTH

ER

S, R

EP

RO

DU

CE

D O

R U

SE

D F

OR

AN

Y P

UR

PO

SE

S E

XC

EP

T A

S A

UTH

OR

IZE

D IN

WR

ITIN

G B

Y W

ALD

NE

RS

BU

SIN

ES

S E

NV

IRO

NM

EN

TS.

DR

AWIN

GS

AR

E F

OR

FU

RN

ITU

RE

SP

EC

IFIC

ATIO

NS

ON

LY A

ND

AR

E N

OT

INTE

ND

ED

FO

R C

ON

STR

UC

TIO

N P

UR

PO

SE

S. W

E W

ILL

NO

T B

E R

ES

PO

NS

IBLE

FO

R E

RR

OR

S IN

CU

RR

ED

TH

RO

UG

H T

HE

IR U

SE

BY

OTH

ER

TR

AD

ES

.

XV

IA D

RAW

ING

& S

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

SFO

R R

EV

IEW

PU

RP

OS

ES

ON

LY

- NO

T FO

R O

RD

ER

EN

TRY

-XX

XX

/XX

/XX

DAT

E

EB

XX

XX

XX

XX

PR

OJ/

QTE

#: 8

343/

DR

AWN

BY:

XX

XX

XX

X

1/2

STA

TIO

N

6C18

NU

RS

ER

EC

EP

TIO

N

TOIL

ET

RO

OM

6C08

PH

ON

EB

OO

TH

6C01

6C02

MEMMFAB7

MEMMFAB7

D52

V40

.000

/94.

858R

AEAF

98-3

/4"

Ele

vatio

n A

ES

eal F

inis

h - 6

249:

PLA

TIN

UM

SO

LID

STC

Per

form

ance

- D

oubl

e S

eals

Ele

vatio

n A

FS

eal F

inis

h - 6

249:

PLA

TIN

UM

SO

LID

STC

Per

form

ance

- D

oubl

e S

eals

Ski

n E

leva

tion

6500

-C

LA4E

4

GE

435

6500

94.8

58" H

40.0

00" W

93.7

17" H

51.2

70" W

T3541

D66

95

6500

D3F

7E

T868C

94.8

58" H

40.0

00" W

6500

-A

D66

95

D4B

33

T3541

T868C

GE

435

LA4E

493

.717

" H51

.270

" W

D07

BA

D89

56

8'

Scal

e: 3

/16"

= 1

'

3/16

"=1'

-0"

TYP

ICA

L FR

ON

T - V

IA W

all w

/ Int

egra

l Slid

er

RE

VIS

ION

S

XX

/XX

/XX

2/2

X

DAT

E

SA

LES

:

NO

TE!

XX

XX

XX

X

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

N

XX

XX

XX

X

THE

SE

DR

AWIN

GS

AR

E T

HE

CO

NFI

DE

NTI

AL

PR

OP

ER

TY O

F W

ALD

NE

RS

BU

SIN

ES

S E

NV

IRO

NM

EN

TS. T

O B

E R

ETU

RN

ED

UP

ON

RE

QU

ES

T, N

OT

TO B

E D

ISC

LOS

ED

TO

OTH

ER

S, R

EP

RO

DU

CE

D O

R U

SE

D F

OR

AN

Y P

UR

PO

SE

S E

XC

EP

T A

S A

UTH

OR

IZE

D IN

WR

ITIN

G B

Y W

ALD

NE

RS

BU

SIN

ES

S E

NV

IRO

NM

EN

TS.

DR

AWIN

GS

AR

E F

OR

FU

RN

ITU

RE

SP

EC

IFIC

ATIO

NS

ON

LY A

ND

AR

E N

OT

INTE

ND

ED

FO

R C

ON

STR

UC

TIO

N P

UR

PO

SE

S. W

E W

ILL

NO

T B

E R

ES

PO

NS

IBLE

FO

R E

RR

OR

S IN

CU

RR

ED

TH

RO

UG

H T

HE

IR U

SE

BY

OTH

ER

TR

AD

ES

.

XX

/XX

/XX

X

XX

/XX

/XX

SC

ALE

:

PR

OJ/

QTE

#: 8

343/

DAT

E:

XX

XX

XX

X

CA

XX

/XX

/XX

SH

EE

T#:

NO

.V

IA D

RAW

ING

& S

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

SFO

R R

EV

IEW

PU

RP

OS

ES

ON

LY

- NO

T FO

R O

RD

ER

EN

TRY

-

CLI

EN

T:

k:\H

EA

LTH

& H

OS

PIT

AL

CO

RP

\Met

ropo

litan

Met

ropo

litan

Hos

pita

l - P

HO

NE

TITL

E:

X

XX

XX

XX

X

03.1

6.17

k:\H

EA

LTH

& H

OS

PIT

AL

CO

RP

\Met

ropo

litan

X

FILE

:

EB

DR

AWN

BY:



Project No. 4587

WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 1

SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Wall guards.2. Handrails.3. Corner guards.4. Abuse-resistant wall coverings.



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of wall and door protection showing locations and extent.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. Show handrail design and support spacing required to withstand structural loads.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches long.


A. Product certificates.

B. Material certificates.

C. Sample warranty.



1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of wall protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.




Project No. 4587


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1.

2.2 WALL GUARDS

A. Chair Rail (CR-#): Standard-duty, PVC-free assembly consisting of continuous snap-on plastic cover installed over concealed retainer; designed to withstand impacts.

1. Provide product indicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.2. Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.078-inch wall thickness; in dimensions and

profiles indicated on Drawings.a. Color and Texture: As indicated.

3. Continuous Retainer: Minimum 0.080-inch- thick, one-piece, extruded aluminum.4. Bumper: Continuous, resilient bumper cushion(s).5. End Caps and Corners: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; matching color cover;

field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.6. Accessories: Concealed splices and mounting hardware.7. Mounting: Surface mounted directly to wall .

2.3 HANDRAILS

A. Wood Handrail (HR-#): Manufacturer's standard assembly consisting of continuous solid wood handrail, with stainless steel mounting brackets.

1. Wood Handrail: As indicated in the Finish Schedule on Drawings with 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) diameter gripping surface.

a. End Caps, Returns, Corners, and Mounting Brackets: stainless steel.b. Wood Species: As indicated in the Finish Schedule.c. Finish: Stained.d. Color: As indicated in the Finish Schedule.

2. Mounting Bracket: manufacturer's standard stainless steel.

a. Concealed screw attachment.



Project No. 4587


2.4 CORNER GUARDS

A. Surface-Mounted, Plastic-Cover Corner Guards (CG-#) : Manufacturer's standard, PVC-free assembly consisting of snap-on, resilient plastic cover installed over retainer; including mounting hardware; fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.

1. Provide product indicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.2. Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.078-inch wall thickness; in dimensions and

profiles indicated on Drawings.

a. Color and Texture: As indicated.

3. Continuous Retainer: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick, one-piece, extruded aluminum.4. Top and Bottom Caps: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color matching cover; field

adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.

2.5 ABUSE-RESISTANT WALL COVERINGS

A. Abuse-Resistant Sheet Wall Covering (PWP-#): Fabricated from semirigid, plastic sheet wall-covering material.

1. Manufacturer: As indicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.2. Size: 48 by 120 inches (1219 by 2438 mm) for sheet.3. Sheet Thickness: 0.035 inch (1.0 mm).4. Color and Texture: As indicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.5. Height: As indicated.6. Trim and Joint Moldings: Extruded rigid plastic that matches wall-covering color.7. Mounting: Adhesive.

2.6 MATERIALS

A. Plastic Materials: Chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant plastic with integral color throughout; extruded and sheet material as required, thickness as indicated.

B. Polycarbonate Plastic Sheet: ASTM D 6098, S-PC01, Class 1 or Class 2, abrasion resistant; with a minimum impact-resistance rating of 15 ft.-lbf/in. of notch when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A.

C. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where exposed to view.

D. Adhesive: As recommended by protection-product manufacturer and with a VOC content of 70 g/L or less.



Project No. 4587


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation Quality: Install wall protection according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.

B. Mounting Heights: Install wall protection in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings.

C. Accessories: Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, trim, joint moldings, and other accessories required for a complete installation.

1. Provide anchoring devices and suitable locations to withstand imposed loads.2. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet, splice aluminum retainers

and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer than 12 inches apart.3. Adjust end and top caps as required to ensure tight seams.




Project No. 4587

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1

SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes washroom and custodial accessories.




A. Sample warranty.



1.5 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.



Project No. 4587

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 2

2.2 WASHROOM AND CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES

A. Provide products as indicated in the Toilet Accessory Schedule on the Drawings or comparable product identical in material and craftsmanship by one of the following:

1. American Specialties, Inc2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc3. Bradley Corporation4. Georgia-Pacific5. Kimberly-Clark

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled.

B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446.




Project No. 4587

FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 104413 - 1

SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fire-protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers.

B. Fire Extinguishers Cabinets: Whether shown or not, furnish and install not less than one fire extinguisher cabinets for each 75 feet of travel distance or 11,250 Sq. Ft., whichever gives you the greater number of unit.



B. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets.



1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.

1.5 SEQUENCING

A. Apply vinyl lettering on field-painted fire-protection cabinets after painting is complete.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET (FEC)

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

1. Basis of Design: Potter Roemer Fire Pro; model 7321 Trimless

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.



Project No. 4587


C. Cabinet Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.

D. Recessed Cabinet:

1. Trimless with Concealed Flange: Surface of surrounding wall finishes flush with exterior finished surface of cabinet frame and door, without overlapping trim attached to cabinet. Provide recessed flange, of same material as box, attached to box to act as drywall bead.

E. Door Material: Steel sheet.

F. Door Style: Full acrylic bubble with frame.

G. Door Glazing: Molded acrylic bubble.

1. Acrylic Bubble Color: Clear, transparent.

H. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

I. Accessories:

1. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect.

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."

1) Application Process: Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters.2) Lettering Color: Red.3) Orientation: Vertical.

J. Materials:

1. Cold-Rolled Steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

a. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.b. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color

densities.

2. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 3 mm thick, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished).

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.



Project No. 4587


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Prepare recesses for recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

B. Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

D. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated.

E. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding.




Project No. 4587

METAL LOCKERS 105113 - 1

SECTION 105113 - METAL LOCKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Knocked-down corridor lockers.2. Welded corridor lockers.


A. Product data.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and locker identification system and numbering sequence.

C. Samples: For each color specified.


A. Sample warranties.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Accessibility Requirements: For lockers indicated to be accessible, comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1.

2.2 WELDED CORRIDOR LOCKERS

A. Doors: One piece; fabricated from 0.075-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; formed into channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right-angle single bend at horizontal edges.



Project No. 4587


1. Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard reinforcing angles, channels, or stiffeners for doors more than 15 inches wide; welded to inner face of doors.

2. Door Style: Vented panel as follows:

a. Louvered Vents: No fewer than three louver openings at top and bottom for double-tier lockers.

B. Body: Assembled by welding body components together. Fabricate from unperforated steel sheet with thicknesses as follows:

1. Tops, Bottoms, and Sides: 0.060-inch nominal thickness.2. Backs: 0.048-inch nominal thickness.3. Shelves: 0.060-inch nominal thickness, with double bend at front and single bend at sides

and back.

C. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; lapped and factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into vertical main frames. Form continuous, integral, full-height door strikes on vertical main frames.

D. Hinges:

1. Knuckle Hinges: Steel, full loop, five or seven knuckles, tight pin; minimum 2 inches high. Provide no fewer than three hinges for each door more than 42 inches high.

E. Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Stainless-steel cup with integral door pull, recessed so locking device does not protrude beyond door face; pry and vandal resistant.

1. Multipoint Latching: Finger-lift latch control designed for use with built-in combination locks or padlocks; positive automatic latching and prelocking.

a. Latch Hooks: Equip doors 48 inches and higher with three latch hooks and doors less than 48 inches high with two latch hooks; fabricated from 0.120-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded to full-height door strikes; with resilient silencer on each latch hook.

b. Latching Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard, rattle-free latching mechanism.

F. Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard, etched, embossed, or stamped aluminum plates, with numbers and letters at least 3/8 inch high.

G. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type, aluminum or steel; zinc plated.

H. Continuous Zee Base: Fabricated from, manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.

1. Height: 4 inches.

I. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from 0.048-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet, with a pitch of approximately 20 degrees.

1. Closures: Vertical -end type.

J. Recess Trim: Fabricated from 0.048-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.



Project No. 4587


K. Filler Panels: Fabricated from 0.048-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.

L. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated from 0.048-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.

M. Materials:

1. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable for exposed applications.

N. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, without warp, and with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp edges and burrs.

B. Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. Factory weld frame members of each metal locker together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly.

C. Equipment: Provide each locker with an identification plate and the following equipment:

1. Double-Tier Units: One double-prong ceiling hook and two single-prong wall hooks.

D. Welded Construction: Factory preassemble metal lockers by welding all joints, seams, and connections; with no bolts, nuts, screws, or rivets used in assembly of main locker groups. Factory weld main locker groups into one-piece structures. Grind exposed welds flush.

E. Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows:

1. Locate bottom shelf no lower than 15 inches above the floor.2. Where hooks, coat rods, or additional shelves are provided, locate no higher than 48

inches above the floor.

F. Continuous Base: Formed into channel or zee profile for stiffness, and fabricated in lengths as long as practical to enclose base and base ends of metal lockers; finished to match lockers.

G. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated in lengths as long as practical, without visible fasteners at splice locations; finished to match lockers.

H. Recess Trim: Fabricated with minimum 2-1/2-inch face width and in lengths as long as practical; finished to match lockers.

I. Filler Panels: Fabricated in an unequal leg angle shape; finished to match lockers. Provide slip-joint filler angle formed to receive filler panel.

J. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated with 1-inch- wide edge dimension, and designed for concealing fasteners and holes at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers.



Project No. 4587


K. Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners, except for perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers.

L. Center Dividers: Full-depth, vertical partitions between bottom and shelf; finished to match lockers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install lockers level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.

1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more than 36 inches o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through backup reinforcing plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion.

2. Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top and bottom of lockers.3. Anchor back-to-back metal lockers to floor.

B. Welded Lockers: Connect groups together with standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on face frames.

C. Trim: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates.

1. Attach recess trim to recessed metal lockers with concealed clips.2. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners.3. Attach sloping-top units to metal lockers, with closures at exposed ends.




Project No. 4587

MANUAL ROLLER SHADES 122413 - 1

SECTION 122413 - MANUAL ROLLER SHADES

GENERAL


A. Sunscreen roller shades.


A. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories.

B. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Coordination with gypsum board assemblies for installation of shade pockets, closures and related accessories.

C. Section 095100 - Acoustical Ceilings: Coordination with acoustical ceiling systems for installation of shade pockets, closures and related accessories.

D. Division 16 - Electrical: Electric service for motor controls.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM G 21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi.

B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

C. NFPA 701 - Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 013000.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.2. Styles, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles, features,

finishes and operating instructions.3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.4. Mounting details and installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, product details, installation details, operational clearances, wiring diagrams and relationship to adjacent work.



Project No. 4587


1. Prepare shop drawings on Autocad or Microstation format using base sheets provided electronically by the Architect.

D. Window Treatment Schedule: For all roller shades. Use same room designations as indicated on the Drawings and include opening sizes and key to typical mounting details.

E. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, one set of shade cloth options and aluminum finish color samples representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

F. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, one complete set of shade components, unassembled, demonstrating compliance with specified requirements. Shadecloth sample and aluminum finish sample as selected. Mark face of material to indicate interior faces.

G. Maintenance Data: Methods for maintaining roller shades, precautions regarding cleaning materials and methods, instructions for operating hardware and controls.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer with a minimum of twenty years experience in manufacturing products comparable to those specified in this section.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience in installing products comparable to those specified in this section.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701 small and large-scale vertical burn. Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use.

D. Electrical Components: NFPA Article 100 listed and labeled by either UL or ETL or other testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, marked for intended use, and tested as a system. Individual testing of components will not be acceptable in lieu of system testing.

E. Anti-Microbial Characteristics: 'No Growth' per ASTM G 21 results for fungi ATCC9642, ATCC 9644, ATCC9645.

F. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up (manual shades only) of one roller shade assembly for evaluation of mounting, appearance and accessories.

1. Locate mock-up in window designated by Architect.2. Do not proceed with remaining work until, mock-up is accepted by Architect.


A. Deliver shades in factory-labeled packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-test-response characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations indicated on Drawings and in the Window Treatment Schedule.



Project No. 4587



A. Environmental Limitations: Install roller shades after finish work including painting is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Roller Shade Hardware and Chain Warranty: Manufacturer's standard non-depreciating twenty-five year limited warranty.

B. Standard Shadecloth: Manufacturer's standard twenty-five year warranty.

C. Roller Shade Installation: One year from date of Substantial Completion, not including scaffolding, lifts or other means to reach inaccessible areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: MechoShade Systems, Inc., which is located at: 42-03 35th St.; Long Island City, NY 11101; Tel: 718-729-2020; Fax: 718-729-2941;[email protected]; Web:www.mechoshade.com

B. Substitutions: Not permitted.

C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 016000.

D. Alternates: Any pricing for alternate products shall be listed separately from the base bid specified product. Any alternate pricing must include line-by-line compliance or non-compliance with the specifications. If the alternate product is acceptable to the Architect, the specified manufacturer will be given the opportunity to provide an equivalent proposal.

2.2 ROLLER SHADE TYPE AND SHADECLOTH

A. Manually Operated Shades:

1. Mounting: Surface mounted.2. Configuration: Single solar shadecloth.3. Solar Shadecloths:

a. Fabric: EuroTwill 6000, finely woven Reversible Weave at 3 percent open. Reverse side can be used facing interior if specified.



Project No. 4587


2.3 SHADE BAND

A. Shade Bands: Construction of shade band includes the fabric, the hem weight, hem-pocket, shade roller tube, and the attachment of the shade band to the roller tube. Sewn hems and open hem pockets are not acceptable.

1. Hem Pockets and Hem Weights: Fabric hem pocket with RF-welded seams (including welded ends) and concealed hem weights. Hem weights shall be of appropriate size and weight for shade band. Hem weight shall be continuous inside a sealed hem pocket. Hem pocket construction and hem weights shall be similar, for all shades within one room.

2. Shade Band and Shade Roller Attachment:

a. Use extruded aluminum shade roller tube of a diameter and wall thickness required to support shade fabric without excessive deflection. Roller tubes less than 1.55 inch in diameter for manual shades, and less than 2.55 inches for motorize shades are not acceptable.

b. Provide for positive mechanical engagement with drive / brake mechanism.c. Provide for positive mechanical attachment of shade band to roller tube; shade

band shall be made removable / replaceable with a "snap-on" "snap-off" spline mounting, without having to remove shade roller from shade brackets.

d. Mounting spline shall not require use of adhesives, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets.

e. Any method of attaching shade band to roller tube that requires the use of: adhesive, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets are not acceptable.

2.4 SHADE FABRlCATlON

A. Fabricate units to completely fill existing openings from head to sill and jamb-to-jamb, unless specifically indicated otherwise.

B. Provide battens in standard shades as required to assure proper tracking and uniform rolling of the shadebands. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring the width-to-height (W:H) ratios shall not exceed manufacturer's standards or, in absence of such standards, shall be responsible for establishing appropriate standards to assure proper tracking and rolling of the shadecloth within specified standards. Battens shall be roll-formed stainless steel or tempered steel, as required.

C. For railroaded shadebands, provide seams in railroaded multi-width shadebands as required to meet size requirements and in accordance with seam alignment as acceptable to Architect. Seams shall be properly located. Furnish battens in place of plain seams when the width, height, or weight of the shade exceeds manufacturer's standards. In absence of such standards, assure proper use of seams or battens as required to, and assure the proper tracking of the railroaded multi-width shadebands.

D. Provide battens for railroaded shades when width-to-height (W:H) ratios meet or exceed manufacturer's standards. In absence of manufacturer's standards, be responsible for proper use and placement of battens to assure proper tracking and roll of shadebands.



Project No. 4587


2.5 COMPONENTS

A. Access and Material Requirements:

1. Provide shade hardware allowing for the removal of shade roller tube from brackets without removing hardware from opening and without requiring end or center supports to be removed.

2. Provide shade hardware that allows for removal and re-mounting of the shade bands without having to remove the shade tube, drive or operating support brackets.

3. Use only Delrin engineered plastics by DuPont for all plastic components of shade hardware. Styrene based plastics, and /or polyester, or reinforced polyester will not be acceptable.

B. Manual Operated Chain Drive Hardware and Brackets:

1. Provide for universal, regular and offset drive capacity, allowing drive chain to fall at front, rear or non-offset for all shade drive end brackets. Universal offset shall be adjustable for future change.

2. Provide hardware capable for installation of a removable fascia, for both regular and/or reverse roll, which shall be installed without exposed fastening devices of any kind.

3. Provide shade hardware system that allows for removable regular and/or reverse roll fascias to be mounted continuously across two or more shade bands without requiring exposed fasteners of any kind.

4. Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands (multi-banded shades) by a single chain operator, subject to manufacturer's design criteria. Connectors shall be offset to assure alignment from the first to the last shade band.

5. Provide shade hardware system that allows multi-banded manually operated shades to be capable of smooth operation when the axis is offset a maximum of 6 degrees on each side of the plane perpendicular to the radial line of the curve, for a 12 degrees total offset.

6. Provide positive mechanical engagement of drive mechanism to shade roller tube. Friction fit connectors for drive mechanism connection to shade roller tube are not acceptable

7. Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch thick plated steel or heavier as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade.

8. Drive Bracket / Brake Assembly:

a. MechoShade Drive Bracket model M5 shall be fully integrated with all MechoShade accessories, including, but not limited to: SnapLoc fascia, room darkening side / sill channels, center supports and connectors for multi-banded shades.

b. M5 drive sprocket and brake assembly shall rotate and be supported on a welded 3/8 inch steel pin.

c. The brake shall be an over-running clutch design which disengages to 90 percent during the raising and lowering of a shade. The brake shall withstand a pull force of 50 lbs. (22 kg) in the stopped position.

d. The braking mechanism shall be applied to an oil-impregnated hub on to which the brake system is mounted. The oil impregnated hub design includes an articulated brake assembly, which assures a smooth, non-jerky operation in raising and lowering the shades. The assembly shall be permanently lubricated. Products that require externally applied lubrication and or not permanently lubricated are not acceptable.

e. The entire M5 assembly shall be fully mounted on the steel support bracket, and fully independent of the shade tube assembly, which may be removed and reinstalled without effecting the roller shade limit adjustments.



Project No. 4587


f. Drive Chain: #10 qualified stainless steel chain rated to 90 lb. minimum breaking strength. Nickel plate chain shall not be accepted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Allow proper clearances for window operation hardware.

B. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.

C. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Engage Installer to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain roller shade systems.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.




Project No. 4587

MOTORIZED ROLLER SHADES 122513 - 1

SECTION 122513 - MOTORIZED ROLLER SHADES

GENERAL


A. Provide electrically operated roller shades. Include local, group and master motor control systems for shade operation with data input from sun tracking monitoring device.


A. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories.

B. Section 092116.23 - Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies: Coordination with gypsum board assemblies for installation of shade pockets, closures and related accessories.

C. Section 095123 - Acoustical Tile Ceilings.

D. Division 16 - Electrical: Electric service for motors, motor controls, internal communication, low voltage wiring and data transfer, and connection to Internet.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM G 21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi.

B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

C. NFPA 701 - Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.2. Styles, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles, features,

finishes and operating instructions.3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.4. Mounting details and installation methods.5. Typical wiring diagrams including integration of motor controllers with building

management system, audiovisual, lighting control and solar and sky monitoring systems as applicable.



Project No. 4587


C. Shop Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, product details, installation details, operational clearances, wiring diagrams and relationship to adjacent work.

1. Prepare shop drawings on Autocad or Microstation format using base sheets provided electronically by the Architect.

2. Prepare control wiring diagrams based on zones, switching and operational requirements provided by the Architect in electronic format.

D. Window Treatment Schedule: For all roller shades. Use same room designations as indicated on the Drawings and include opening sizes and key to typical mounting details.

E. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, one set of shade cloth options and aluminum finish color samples representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

F. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, one complete set of shade components, unassembled, demonstrating compliance with specified requirements. Shadecloth sample and aluminum finish sample as selected. Mark face of material to indicate interior faces.

G. Maintenance Data: Methods for maintaining roller shades, precautions regarding cleaning materials and methods, instructions for operating hardware and controls.

H. Solar and Sky Monitoring Systems: Functionality of the solar monitoring and sky monitoring systems. Provide non-proprietary detailed description of the science and logic employed in the automated solar ray tracking control system and a schedule of the solar data provided.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roller shades system through one source from a single manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience and minimum of five projects of similar scope and size in manufacturing products comparable to those specified in this section.

B. Installer for Roller Shade System - Qualifications: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience in installing products comparable to those specified in this section.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701 small and large-scale vertical burn. Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use.

D. Electrical Components: NFPA Article 100 listed and labeled by either UL or ETL or other testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, marked for intended use, and tested as a system. Individual testing of components will not be acceptable in lieu of system testing.

E. ShadeCloth Anti-Microbial Characteristics: 'No Growth' per ASTM G 21 results for fungi ATCC9642, ATCC 9644, ATCC9645.



Project No. 4587


F. Third Party Evaluation: Provide documentation stating the shade cloth has undergone third party evaluation for all chemical inputs, down to a scale of 100 parts per million, that have been evaluated for human and environmental safety. Identify any and all inputs, which are known to be carcinogenic, mutagenic, teratogenic, reproductively toxic, or endocrine disrupting. Also identify items that are toxic to aquatic systems, contain heavy metals, or organohalogens. The material shall contain no inputs that are known problems to human or environmental health per the above major criteria, except for an input that is required to meet local fire codes.

G. Recycling Characteristics: Provide documentation that the shade cloth can, and is part of a closed loop of perpetual use and not be required to be down cycled, incinerated or otherwise thrown away. Scrap material can be sent back to the mill for reprocessing and recycling into the same quality yarn and woven into new material, without down cycling. Certify that this process is currently underway and will be utilized for this project.

H. Perpetual Use Certification: Certify that at the end of the useful life of the shade cloth, that the material can be sent back to the manufacturer for recapture as part of a closed loop of perpetual use and that the material can and will be reconstituted into new yarn, for weaving into new shade cloth. Provide information on each shade band indicating that the shade band can be sent back to the manufacturer for this purpose.

I. Requirements for Roller Shade Installer/Contractor:

1. Roller Shade Hardware, shade fabric, motor, and all related controls shall be furnished and installed as a complete two-way communicating system and assembly.

2. Roller Shade Installer/Contractor shall list all components and systems included in their bid, including but not limited to, the prime manufacturer of the motor control and automated equipment and shall be financially responsible for any change orders and/or back charges required by the BMS, AV, or Lighting Control Systems contractors to interface with the automatic solar tracking system and the motorized roller shade system.

J. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up of one roller shade assembly for evaluation of mounting, appearance and accessories.

1. Locate mock-up in window designated by Architect.2. Do not proceed with remaining work until, mock-up is accepted by Architect.


A. Deliver shades in factory-labeled packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-test-response characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations indicated on Drawings and in the Window Treatment Schedule.


A. Environmental Limitations: Install roller shades after finish work including painting is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Power and control wiring shall be complete and certified, fully operational with uninterrupted communication on the lines and minimal noise certified by a commissioning agent specified in other sections.



Project No. 4587


1. 485, ICON, Lonmark and Dry Contract Network: Noise on the line not to exceed shade manufacturer's limits.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Roller Shade Hardware and Chain Warranty: Manufacturer's standard non-depreciating twenty-five year limited warranty.

B. Roller Shade Motors and Motor Control Systems: Manufacturer's standard non-depreciating five year warranty.

C. Roller Shade Installation: One year from date of Substantial Completion, not including scaffolding, lifts or other means to reach inaccessible areas, which are deemed owners responsibility.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: MechoShade Systems, Inc., which is located at: 42-03 35th St.; Long Island City, NY 11101; Tel: 718-729-2020; Fax: 718-729-2941; Emarequest info ([email protected]); Web:www.mechoshade.com

B. Information Required with Submittal of Bid: In order to evaluate proposals for motorized roller shade control systems, the Architect requires the following information be submitted prior to the award of the roller shade system.

1. Bid proposal shall be accompanied with a document that notes all deviations from these specifications on a line-by-line basis.

2. Bid shall include separate line items listing the control/interface components required for building automation systems and building management systems (BAS/BMS), daylighting, audiovisual, and/or central integration systems. Roller shade controls manufacturer shall list all components included in their bid and shall include a letter stating that they shall be financially responsible for any change orders and/or back charges required by the BAS/BMS, audiovisual, or lighting control systems contractors to interface with the motorized roller shade system.

C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 016000 - Product Requirements.



Project No. 4587


2.2 ROLLER SHADE TYPES

A. Roller Shade Schedule: Refer to the Drawings for locations.

1. Shade Type WT-1: Motorized interior solar roller shades in all exterior / interior windows of rooms and spaces as shown on referenced Drawings, and related motor control requirements systems. Include the following as scheduled and as indicated on the Drawings:

a. Closure mount and closure

2.3 INTELLIGENT ENCODEHADE MOTOR DRIVE SYSTEM

A. Shade Motors:

1. Quiet [44 to 46 db] Intelligent Encoded Motor and Control System: Tubular, asynchronous (non-synchronous) motors, with built-in reversible capacitor operating at 110v AC (60hz), (230v/50 hz AC) single phase, temperature Class A, thermally protected, totally enclosed, maintenance free with line voltage power supply equipped with locking disconnect plug assembly furnished with each motor.

2. Conceal motors inside shade roller tube.3. Maximum current draw for each shade motor of 2.3 amps at 110 V (.9 amps at 230 V

AC).4. Use motors rated at the same nominal speed for all shades in the same room.

B. Total hanging weight of shade band shall not exceed 80 percent of the rated lifting capacity of the shade motor and tube assembly. Spring assisted lift systems shall not be accepted.

C. Quiet Intelligent Encoded Motor System (software, two-way communication): Specifications and design are based on the Intelligent Motor Control System / WhisperShade-IQ(TM) Motor System) as manufactured by MechoShade Systems, Inc. Other systems may be acceptable providing all of the following performance capabilities are provided. Motor control systems not in complete compliance with these performance criteria shall not be accepted as equal systems.

1. Quiet operation of up to 46dBa within 3 feet, open air.2. Upper and lower stopping points (operating limits) of shade bands shall be programmed

into motors via a hand held removable program module / configurator.3. Intermediate stopping positions for shades shall allow for up to three repeatable and

precise aligned positions.4. Up to 103 available alignment points including 3-user programmable predefined

intermediate positions, for a total of 5-defined and aligned positions. All shades on the same switch circuit with the same opening height shall align at each intermediate stopping position.

5. Two inherent methods of control:

a. Cost effective, low voltage, hardwired dry-contact for local switch or 3rd party control operation.

b. Expandable to 2-way communication network with IQ/485-NI to support whole building low-voltage control and integration.



Project No. 4587


6. Uniform or Regular Modes of Operation:

a. Uniform mode shall allow for shades to only move to intermediate stop positions.b. Regular mode shall allow for shades to move to both intermediate stop positions,

plus any position desired between the upper and lower limits as set by the installer.

7. Wall Switches:

a. IQ-Switch: in 5 or 10 button, single gang, low voltage.

8. Provide Wall Switches:

a. Conference Center: Shades shall be operated by a 4 and 8 button low voltage standard switches or programmable intelligent switches [IS]. Standard switch shall be wired to a bus interface and the bus interface will be programmed to transmit an address for the local switch.

b. Intelligent switches may be installed anywhere on the busline. Each IS shall be capable of storing one control level address to be broadcast along the busline.

c. An address that is transmitted by either a switch or central controller shall be responded to by those motors with the same address in their control table.

d. IS shall provide for interface with other low voltage input devices via a set of dry contact terminals located on the switch.

e. Standard switch or IS may control an individual, sub-group or group of motors in accordance with the address in each motor.

2.4 ROLLER SHADE TYPE AND SHADECLOTH

A. Motorized Shades:

1. Mounting: Surface mounted.2. Solar Shadecloths:

a. Fabric: EuroTwill 6000, finely woven Reversible Weave at 3 percent open. Reverse side can be used facing interior if specified.

b. Color: Selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

2.5 SHADE BAND

A. Shade Bands: Construction of shade band includes the fabric, the enclosed hem weight, shade roller tube, and the attachment of the shade band to the roller tube. Sewn hems and open hem pockets shall not be acceptable.

1. Concealed Hembar: Shall be continuous extruded aluminum for entire width of shade band and with the following characteristics:

a. Hembar shall be heat sealed on all sides.b. Open ends shall not be accepted.



Project No. 4587


2. Shade band and Shade Roller Attachment:

a. Use extruded aluminum shade roller tube of a diameter and wall thickness required to support shade fabric without excessive deflection.

b. Provide for positive mechanical attachment of shade band to roller tube; shade band shall be made removable / replaceable with a "snap-on" snap-off" Spline mounting, without having to remove shade roller from shade brackets.

c. Mounting Spline shall not require use of adhesives, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets.

d. Any method of attaching shade band to roller tube that requires the use of: adhesive, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets, does not meet the performance requirements of this specification and shall not be accepted.

2.6 SHADE FABRlCATlON

A. Fabricate units to completely fill existing openings from head to sill and jamb-to-jamb, unless specifically indicated otherwise.

B. Fabricate shadecloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Fabricate with heat-sealed trimmed edges to hang straight without curling or raveling. Fabricate unguided shadecloth to roll true and straight without shifting sideways more than 1/8 inch in either direction per 8 feet of shade height due to warp distortion or weave design. Fabricate hem as follows:

1. Bottom hem weights.2. Concealed hemtube.

C. Provide battens in standard shades as required to assure proper tracking and uniform rolling of the shadebands. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring the width-to-height (W:H) ratios shall not exceed manufacturer's standards or, in absence of such standards, shall be responsible for establishing appropriate standards to assure proper tracking and rolling of the shadecloth within specified standards. Battens shall be roll-formed stainless steel or tempered steel, as required.

D. For railroaded shadebands, provide seams in railroaded multi-width shadebands as required to meet size requirements and in accordance with seam alignment as acceptable to Architect. Seams shall be properly located. Furnish battens in place of plain seams when the width, height, or weight of the shade exceeds manufacturer's standards. In absence of such standards, assure proper use of seams or battens as required to, and assure the proper tracking of the railroaded multi-width shadebands.

E. Provide battens for railroaded shades when width-to-height (W:H) ratios meet or exceed manufacturer's standards. In absence of manufacturer's standards, be responsible for proper use and placement of battens to assure proper tracking and roll of shadebands.

1. Batten pockets shall be self-colored fabric front and back RF welded into the shadecloth. A self-color opaque liner shall be provided front and back to eliminate any see through of the batten pocket that shall not exceed 1-1/2 inches high and be totally opaque. A see-through moire effect, which occurs with multiple layers of transparent fabrics, shall not be acceptable.



Project No. 4587


2.7 COMPONENTS

A. Access and Material Requirements:

1. Provide shade hardware allowing for the removal of shade roller tube from brackets without removing hardware from opening and without requiring end or center supports to be removed.

2. Provide shade hardware that allows for removal and re-mounting of the shade bands without having to remove the shade tube, drive or operating support brackets.

3. Use only Delrin engineered plastics by DuPont for all plastic components of shade hardware. Styrene based plastics, and /or polyester, or reinforced polyester will not be acceptable.

B. Motorized Shade Hardware and Shade Brackets:

1. Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch thick plated steel, or heavier, thicker, as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade.

2. Provide shade hardware system that allows for field adjustment of motor or replacement of any operable hardware component without requiring removal of brackets, regardless of mounting position (inside, or outside mount).

3. Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands offset by a maximum of 8-45 degrees from the motor axis between shade bands (4-22.5 degrees) on each side of the radial line, by a single shade motor (multi-banded shade, subject to manufacturer's design criteria).

2.8 ACCESSORlES

A. Pocket Accessories: As indicated on the Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.



Project No. 4587


3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Allow proper clearances for window operation hardware.

B. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.

C. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Test electrically operated shades for proper operation. Repair or replace units, which do not perform correctly.

E. Test automated tracking control system for proper operation. Repair or replace units, which do not perform correctly.

F. Engage Installer to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain roller shade systems.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.




Project No. 4587

SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 123661.16 - 1

SECTION 123661.16 - SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS & SILLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Solid surface material countertops.2. Solid surface material backsplashes.3. Solid surface material end splashes.4. Solid surface material apron fronts.5. Solid surface material sinks.6. Solid surface material sills for Infusion wing walls.


A. Product Data: For countertop materials and sinks.

B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

C. Samples: For each type of material exposed to view.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS

A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS-1.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on finish schedule drawing.

2. Type: Provide Standard type unless Special Purpose type is indicated.3. Integral Sink Bowls: Comply with CSA B45.5/IAPMO Z124.4. Colors and Patterns: As indicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.

B. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded.

C. Integral Sink: Model 810 with rear overflow as manufactured by Corian.



Project No. 4587


2.2 FABRICATIONS

A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. Grade: Premium.

B. Configuration:

1. Front: As indicated on the Drawings..2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner.3. End Splash: Matching backsplash.

C. Countertops: 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material.

D. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material.

E. Wall Sills: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, solid surface material.

F. Joints: Fabricate countertops and sills without joints where possible.

G. Joints: Fabricate countertops in sections for joining in field, with joints at locations indicated on shop drawings.

1. Splined Joints: Accurately cut kerfs in edges at joints for insertion of metal splines to maintain alignment of surfaces at joints where indicated. Make width of cuts slightly more than thickness of splines to provide snug fit. Provide at least three splines in each joint.

H. Cutouts and Holes:

1. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves.

2. Wire-Management Holes: Make holes for wire-management grommets in open coutertop work surfaces in locations indicated. If not indicated, spaced one every 4 feet. Form holes to smooth, even curves.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Wire-Management Grommets: Circular, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.

1. Outside Diameter: 2 inches.2. Color: As selected by Architect by manufacturer's full range.,


A. Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer.



Project No. 4587


B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets. Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane.

C. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.

E. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive.

F. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive.

G. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping.

H. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

END OF SECTION 123661.16